1. How do I cancel my Mvelopes Subscription? 2. How do I create a

Transcription

1. How do I cancel my Mvelopes Subscription? 2. How do I create a
1. How do I cancel my Mvelopes Subscription?
Mvelopes is a paid subscription service.
At the end of your Free Trial, your account will automatically be charged for the subscription
period for which you enrolled. Your subscription is also set to automatically renew
and charge your account at the end of the period for which you have enrolled.
Mvelopes does not offer refunds for service after the free trial ends, but you can disable the
auto-renewal of your account at any time during your subscription period by cancelling your
account.
To disable the auto-renewal (cancel your account) at the end of your subscription period or to
cancel your trial, click on "Ask a Question" in the top toolbar of this support portal and select
"Subscription" as your question category and "Cancellation" under the sub-category. Please
provide us with a reason for the discontinuation of the subscription.
Important: You will need to click the "Finish Submitting Question" button on the
Preliminary Response to Question page to successfully submit the cancellation request.
You can also contact Support via Live Chat to get your subscription cancelled. You can do
this by clicking on "Chat with a live representative" at the top of this window.
Please note: If your request is submitted after 5:00pm (Mountain time) on a Friday, it will not
be processed until the following Monday.
2. How do I create a desktop shortcut for Mvelopes?
To create a desktop icon for Mvelopes Rich Internet Application, please follow the steps
below:
1. Right click on the following link and select 'Copy Shortcut' or 'Copy Link Location':
(Option will vary depending on your web browser)
https://my.mvelopes.com/mvelopesweb/
2. Minimize other applications so that you can see your Windows desktop.
3. Right-click on the Desktop and click on 'New' and select the'Shortcut' option.
4. This will bring up the 'Create' Shortcut window.
5. Paste the link in the location box which is copied earlier.
6. Click on Next.
7. Type a name for the shortcut.
8. Click on Finish.
Instructions for Mac Users:
You can drag any text link from a page onto your desktop to create a shortcut. For example:
http://www.Mvelopes.com/
If you want to make a desktop shortcut of the Mvelopes web page, just drag the Mvelopes
icon (this should reflect an envelope with money in it) that appears to the left of the URL in
the address bar. This is by default a globe icon, but a site can customize it so it may look like
some other 16×16 image. Either way, just drag it to your desktop and it will create a .webloc
file. Just click it to open it up in your default browser.
3. Handling credit card payments
When you make a payment to your credit card account from your bank deposit account
(checking account), you are transferring money from an account with a positive balance to an
account with a negative balance. Your bank statement will show a debit transaction
REMOVING $X from your bank account while your Credit Card statement will show a
credit transaction ADDING $X to your Credit Card Account.
Credit Card Payments always have two transactions. One from your bank account and one to
your credit card account. There are two ways to process these transactions in the application.
1) The Account Transfer Function, and 2) The Credit Card Payment envelope.
1) The Account Transfer Function.
Take the bank transaction and drag it to the bank account in the Spending Accounts pane
(bottom left). The Account Transfer window will appear. Select the Credit Card Account in
the "Transfer To" field and enter the Transaction Amount in the Amount field and click OK.
This will create an Pending Transaction for the Credit Card account. Match the Pending
Credit Card Payment Transaction to the transaction in the New Transactions register. You
will notice that the amount of the transfer will be taken from your Money For credit card
envelope.
2) The Credit Card Payments envelope
This is a feature developed to simplify the process outlined in #1. You can enable and disable
the Credit Card Payments envelope by selecting File>Preferences and unchecking the "Hide
the Credit Card Payments and Account Transfers envelopes" box. Instead of using the
Account Transfer feature, simply assign both the bank and the credit card transaction to
Credit Card Payments envelope. The Money For Credit Card envelope will be affected the
same way as defined in method #1.
4. How do I assign a payment (expense) transaction?
To assign a purchase transaction follow these steps:
1) Highlight the transaction(s) by clicking on it once in the New Transactions register.
2) Click on the Assign button given at the top. This will open a window with the heading
"Select Envelope".
3) Select the envelope you wish to assign the transaction.
4) Click on OK at the bottom of the window.
You can also simply click & drag the transaction(s) to the appropriate envelope. If you are
trying to assign a transaction to an account or envelope that will not accept it, the cursor icon
will change to a stop symbol to signify this. Once the desired envelope is selected, release
the mouse button, and your transaction(s) will be reassigned.
5. Envelope
Funding
Funding is the process of allocating available income into your envelopes. Think of funding
as pre-spending your money to an envelope before you spend it in reality, just like you would
have to do if you were using the traditional envelope budgeting system with actual cash and
physical envelopes.
Funding the envelopes can be a completely manual process or you can fund them based on a
saved profile to save time.
Ideally, you should fund the envelopes on the same day you receive an income deposit or add
a new account into Mvelopes.
In this article, we will cover both scenarios:
1) Funding envelopes immediately after adding a new account
2) Funding envelopes as new income is deposited into your account
After adding your accounts, you will notice that the Income Cash Pool displays the balance of
all of your spending (deposit) accounts. This represents the available cash resources at the
time you added the accounts. You will need to decide where the cash should be allocated for
spending. Be sure to create a savings envelope to allocate (fund) your savings account cash so
you do not errenrously fund money intended for savings to spending envelopes.
1) Funding envelopes after adding a new account:
Click on the Fund button, this will bring up the Funding window with two options:
• The first option, Manually fund one or more envelopes, allows you to manually enter in an
amount for each envelope, including amounts you plan to spend and amounts you plan to
save. At the bottom of the screen, you can see the total amount in the Income Cash Pool, the
total amount you have entered to divide among your envelopes, and the difference between
the two. The difference automatically updates as you enter in your envelope amounts.
• The second option allows you to select a funding profile that you previously created.
Profiles are created either manually, as was described in option two, or automatically by the
system based on your monthly Spending Plan. The option you choose will depend on whether
or not you can fund your envelopes one month in advance, or if you are currently spending
paycheck to paycheck, and when it is in the month or pay cycle. If you can fund your
envelopes one month in advance, and it is the beginning of the month, you can select the third
option and select the profile for that month. You can find out how to put money in your
envelopes if you spend paycheck-to-paycheck or if it is any time in the middle of the month
in the next paragraph. When finished, click ‘Fund to move the cash from the Income Cash
Pool to the envelopes.
2) Funding envelopes as new income is deposited into your account:
Once you assign an income deposit to the Income Cash Pool, Mvelopes will display a
funding window with 3 options:
• The first option allows you skip funding and keep the balance of the Income Cash Pool
intact for later envelope funding.
• The second option allows you to manually decide how to allocate your money, determining
the amount to put in each envelope. You can manually enter in an amount for each envelope,
including amounts you plan to spend and amounts you plan to save. At the bottom of the
screen, you can see the total amount in the Income Cash Pool, the total amount you have
entered to divide among your envelopes, and the difference between the two. The difference
automatically updates as you enter in your envelope amounts.
• The third option allows you to select a funding profile that you previously created. Profiles
are created either manually, as was described in option two, or automatically by the system
based on your monthly Spending Plan. The option you choose will depend on whether or not
you can fund your envelopes one month in advance, or if you are currently spending
paycheck to paycheck, and when it is in the month or pay cycle. If you can fund your
envelopes one month in advance, have already created profiles, and, it is the beginning of the
month, you can select the third option and select the profile for that month. You can find out
how to put money in your envelopes if you spend paycheck-to-paycheck or if it is any time in
the middle of the month in the next paragraph. When finished, click ‘Fund'.
6. Why am I receiving duplicate transactions?
Duplicate transactions occur when the financial institution posts a transaction to their web
site or transaction download file, and then at a later time, modifies the details of the
transaction. When the program logs in to gather transactions, it fails to recognize this changed
transaction, and recognizes it as new, and thus downloads it again. Duplicates happen with
some banks more frequently than others, but most of the time the bank fixes the problem
within a few days.
When duplicate transactions are imported, the application will mark them as a potential
duplicate and you will be prompted to determine if a transaction is a duplicate or not.
From the Potential Duplicate Transaction window, you can click on "Not a Duplicate" to
keep the transaction or click on "Delete Duplicate" to remove it. You can also select the
"Cancel - No Action" option if you want to decide later.
More detail for technical users:
We aggregate the highest quality data available from the banks that we support. Typically,
this is a QFX file, which is an XML file containing transactions that have a Unique Identifier
for each transaction. If your bank supports QFX, we are most likely harvesting that file. If we
are harvesting QFX files and you are getting duplicates, the banks QFX generator is broken
(they are not using UID's according to the QFX specification).
Older file types, such as QIF or CSV, do not have UID's associated with the transaction.
Sometimes, a non-QFX bank will post a transaction with one payee and then re-post the
transaction the next day with an updated payee field. Duplicate transactions from banks that
do not support QFX are typically due to "pre-posting", where the bank posts a transaction
with information in the payee field which is subsequently changed the next day. We create
our own unique transaction ID by hashing the date, payee, and amount for each of the
transactions that are aggregated from a non-QFX account. If a transaction is re-posted, we
will create a new UID based upon a new Hash, thus causing a duplicate.
7. What does an error 108 mean and how do I fix it?
An Error 108 means that there is a prompt at the financial institution's web site that requires
your attention before the application can move forward with getting your transactions from
the financial institution. From time to time a financial institution may require you to update
your information on their web site, you may need to respond to a promotion, accept new
policies for their web site use, etc.
To fix this issue, please go to the financial institutions' website and respond to the prompt you
are given appropriately.
Once you have responded at their website, you will want to manually refresh the account(s) at
that financial institution in the application by clicking on 'Refresh' in the Spending Accounts
Pane. If the account(s) continues to not update, please chat with a customer service
representative by clicking on the Support icon within the application. On the support page,
click on Live Chat and then enter the details of your issue (error 108). You will be connected
with the first available live chat representative.
8. How do I create a Manual (or pending) Transaction?
You may wish to create manual transactions for your cash or offline accounts so that you can
track all of your spending.
You may also wish to create manual transactions for your linked accounts. Because the
system will only retrieve transactions once they have been cleared by your financial
institution, you may want to manually enter your pending transactions as soon as you make
them so you can maintain a more real-time view of your finances. Once these transactions are
received from your financial institutions, you will need to match them against the pending
transactions so your accounts will stay balanced.
You can create a manual transaction in one of two ways:
1. From the New Transactions register - Navigate to the Pending Transactions
section at the bottom of the New Transactions screen. Click "New" in the menu
bar. This will create a new line with editable fields. Enter the Payee, Payment or
Deposit Amount, and a Note if desired. Select the envelope and account and click
"Save.
2. From an envelope or account register - Click "New" in the menu bar of an
envelope or account register. This will create a new line with editable fields. Enter
the transaction information and click "Save."
Once you click "Save," the transaction will be assigned to the envelope you specified and
adjust the balance for the account you selected.
If you selected an offline or cash account in the Account column, then the transaction will be
cleared from the Pending Transactions area and the process will then be complete. However,
if you selected one of your linked accounts such as your bank or credit card, then the
transaction will remain in the Pending Transactions section until you match it against a new
transaction or manually clear the transaction.
Creating a manual transaction is also used when there is a need to re-create a transaction that
was accidentally deleted and you are unable to retrieve it by clicking on the 'undo' button.
9. The Money For envelope
The Money For envelope is one of the most amazingly effective and complex features of the
application. We actually have patents pending on the approach... its that innovative and
powerful.
The Money For envelope and a finance charges envelope are automatically created whenever
you add a Credit Card or Line of Credit account. These envelopes enable you to 1) Pay down
existing debt, 2) Ensure that new debt is not incurred as you spend with Credit Cards, and 3)
Allow you to track how much you pay in finance charges.
Positive balances in Money For envelopes are funds waiting to be paid to the Credit Card or
Line of Credit company.
For example: Lets say you plan to spend $50 on dining out this month, have planned and
funded $50 in a "Dining out" envelope, and use a credit card to make that purchase. When the
purchase hits your Credit Card account, we will grab the transaction from the Credit Card
website for you and present it to you in your "New Transactions" register. When you assign
the transaction to your "Dining out" envelope, the $50 that was sitting in that envelope then
gets transferred into your Money For Credit Card envelope. That cash is now waiting for you
to send it to the Credit Card company to pay them back for the $50 you borrowed from them.
Lets break it down a little further:
1. If you carry a balance on the card from month to month. (And are paying it down!)
The Money For envelope is cash waiting to be paid against a credit account.
Lets assume that you have a credit card (CC X) that you dont use any longer that has a $2000 balance with a minimum monthly payment of $40 and a monthly finance charge of
$10. Lets also assume that you are working to pay off CC X and are paying an additional
$100 per month towards your outstanding balance.
Lets assume that you have a Monthly Average Spending Plan and you plan to "fund" $150
per month into your Money For:CC X. Meaning that in total, you are planning to pay $150
per month towards the finance charges, minimum payment, and outstanding balance. You do
not need to fund the finance charges envelope.
When the $10 Finance Charge transaction shows up from the bank (in the New Transactions
Register), you will assign that transaction to the "Finance Charges" envelope. The finance
charges envelope will stay at a 0.00 balance, but if you look inside the envelope, you will see
the $10 finance charge making the envelope negative, and a 'transfer' from the money for
CCX envelope that zeroes the fianance charges envelope out. This is basically showing you
that out of the $150 payment you made to your credit card, $10 of it went to finance charges,
and it will not affect the balance of your money for envelope.
When you pay $150 to CCX, you are effectively transferring cash from your checking
account into your Credit Card account. An account transfer between a checking account and a
Credit Card removes the $150 from your Money For: CCX envelope taking the balance to
zero. To easily show this in theapplication, simply take both the deposit transaction from
your credit card and the payment transaction from your checking account and place them
in the "Credit Card Payments" envelope. This will update your checking account balance,
your credit card account balance, and your money for CCX envelope.
2. If you pay the balance off in full each month.
If you pay the balances off each month then there is no need to fund the Money For envelope,
past the initial funding to get the Money For envelope to balance. This is because as you
spend on the card, the Money For envelope will increase to match the balance on the card,
and when you pay it off, the balance will go down. For example, if you have a credit card that
has a balance of -$300 when you add the account, and you select the option that you pay it off
in full each month, then the balance of the Money For envelope will be +$300. Now let us
say that throughout the month, you spend a total of an additional $300 on the credit card and
properly assign those transactions to the correct envelopes. As was described in the details of
option 1 above, assignment of the expenditures would increase the balance of the Money For
envelope, so it would now show +$600 the same as the balance on the credit card account.
When the credit card balance is paid, (and you assign the deposit to your credit card
transaction to the "Credit Card Payments" envelope) then the Money For envelope will show
zero.
If your Money For envelope is negative:
A negative Money For envelope indicates that we have paid more to the credit card than what
was originally allocated for paying that credit card. As with any other envelope, we would
need to fund this envelope with the amount that we overspent to bring this envelope back to a
zero balance. The key to understanding the Money For envelope is to remember that all credit
card transactions post inversely in this envelope, so as long as your credit card payment
matches the balance of the Money For envelope, it will zero out after processing the account
to account transfer. It is also helpful to remember that whether you carry a balance or pay off
your card in full each month, you want the money for envelope to have the amount you are
planning to pay to that card funded before you actually make the payment. (This will prevent
the money for envelope from going negative to begin with).
Unfunded Credit Card Purchases
In the event that you assign a credit card purchase with no intentions of paying it back in full,
you will create a negative envelope that will push a deposit in Money For. If there are no
intentions to pay off the purchase in full, more than likely the cash sitting in Money For will
not be "real", meaning that since we are carrying a deficit in the original purchase envelope,
we have a Money For envelope balance that is not reflective of available cash resources. In
this situation, simply transfer the funds out of the Money For envelope back to the original
purchase envelope to cancel out the deficit. After you have done so, the only place that you'll
see the debt will be in the credit card balance in the "Spending Accounts" register.
10. How do I reset Mvelopes?
We have a feature in the application that will allow you to erase everything and start from
scratch.
There are 2 reset options available. They are both listed below:
*Please note, both of these reset options will result in losing all of your history within the
application. If you need this information, we advise that you print out reports before
performing your reset.
1) For a PARTIAL RESET:
* Please note that this an unrecoverable PARTIAL reset. It will remove your transaction
history completely from envelopes and accounts. We recommend printing your Envelope
Balance history reports to use as reference for future planning.
To "start fresh today" while keeping your accounts, custom envelopes, spending, and funding
plans, follow the process below:
1. Be in the application.
2. Select the 'Help' option.
3. Select 'Reset Application' option.
4. Select the 'Partial Reset without history' option (this will be the default option).
5. Type YES in all capital letters
6. Click 'OK'.
2) For a FULL RESET:
* Please note that this an unrecoverable COMPLETE reset. It will remove your accounts,
envelopes, your complete transaction and balance history, and will reset your spending plan.
We recommend printing Spending Plan and Envelope Balance history reports to use as
reference as you walk through setup again.
Follow these steps:
1. Be in the application.
2. Select the 'Help' option.
3. Select the 'Reset Application' option.
4. Select the 'Full Reset' option.
5. Type YES in all capital letters.
6. Click 'OK'.
The current balance of your deposit account(s) (checking money market, etc.) will show in
the Income Cash Pool after you reset. If you have one or more savings accounts added, the
savings account balance(s) may also appear in the Income Cash Pool, depending on if you
have previously moved your savings starting balance to a savings envelope (if you have not
done this previously, now is an excellent time to do so). This money is in your Income Cash
Pool because you now need to proactively decide where the money you have needs to be
spent, and fund your envelopes accordingly.
Tip: The best way to fund after a reset is to fund your envelopes according to what expenses you know you are going to
have before you receive more income. For example, if you have a pending check out for your electricity bill, you would
want to fund your Utilities: Electricity envelope with the amount of the outstanding check, if you know you are going to pay
your credit card bill before you get more income, fund your 'money for' envelope with what you will be paying to that card,
if your car payment is due before you get more income, fund your car payment envelope, etc
11. What is the Income Cash Pool?
The Income Cash Pool is the source of all envelope funding. It acts as a "holding envelope"
for income waiting to be assigned to spending envelopes.
When you assign your paycheck (income transaction) to the ICP, the Income Deposit Options
window appears. The window will ask whether you want to 1) Save the transaction for later
envelope funding, 2) Manually fund one or more envelopes using the transaction, or 3) Fund
using a saved profile.
1) Save for later envelope funding. (default)
If you fund your envelopes at the beginning of the month with income made during the
previous month, the ICP is a place to store income made today to fund next months spending
plan. This is the default setting and if you click "ok", your income transaction amount will be
transfered from the new transactions register into the Income Case Pool register for later use.
2) Manually fund one or more envelopes or 3) Fund using a saved profile
If you fund your envelopes when you get your pycheck, selecting either of these
options enables you to take that income and immediately distribute it across your
envelopes. You can split your income manually or use a saved funding profile to
automatically allocate the paycheck based upon your funding plan. Funding profiles can be
created through your Spending Plan or can be manually created and saved.
12. What is a preferred account?
A preferred account is the default checking account from which you pay your bills. When
you designate an account as your preferred account, it appears first in the Pay From list on the
Payment Center by default. You may add as many checking accounts to pay bills from as
you'd like, but only one account can be designated as the preferred account.
13. How do I add an envelope?
You can add new envelopes in two different places:
Within the Spending Plan:
To add another envelope while in the Spending Plan, click "New" in the menu bar and select
"Envelope" from the drop down menu.
A popup window will appear. Type in the envelope name and select a group if appropriate,
and then select monthly or periodic and required or discretionary.
Click "Save" when you are finished.
From the left windowpane under the Envelopes heading:
To add a new envelope, click "New" in the menu.
When the popup window appears, type in the name of the new envelope. Click "Save" when
you are finished.
14. What should I do if I have forgotten my username and/or
password?
If you have forgotten your username or password, please open the following URL and select
"Click Here":
https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/main?accessCode=D001001001
It will take you to the "Forgot Password" page https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/forgotPasswd. If you forgotten your username,
select "Click Here" in the "Forgot Password" page. You should be redirected to
https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/forgotUserName
If you have forgotten both username and password, you need to contact us through Live Chat.
Click on “Need more help logging in?” link. You will be connected to a live chat
representative after entering your personal information.
15. How do I add a new account to Bill Pay?
1) Click My Accounts tab within the Bill Pay application.
2) In the “What would you like to do”? Drop down list select “Add an account”.
3) Enter all the information. (Fields marked * are mandatory).
4) Click Add Account.
5) You then need to confirm this account once the the deposit and payment transactions hit
this account. This may take 2-3 business days.
16. How do I change my Bill Pay service fee account?
To change the service fee account,
1. Login to Bill Pay.
2. Select My Accounts.
3. From the list of accounts displayed, select "Edit" beside the account you want to nominate
as the service fee/billing account.
4. Check the box besides "Billing Account" and hit Save Changes.
17. How do I add an e-bill (electronic bill)?
You can receive some of your bills online with our Bill Pay. You can view and pay these
bills in the Payment Center.
Our bill pay, powered by Fiserv, has established relationships with hundreds of companies
nationwide, and these companies can send us an electronic version of your bill. These
electronic bills, which are also called e-bills, typically contain the same information included
in the paper bills that are mailed to you.
Your biller may offer the following features as part of your electronic billing service:
•
•
•
Receive your electronic bill through e-mail.
Pay your electronic bills automatically.
Allow you to have a different address, known as your service address, where you receive
your services.
Paper Bills
Some billers will stop sending you paper bills when they start sending you electronic bills.
For these billers, you must agree to receive e-bills only to activate your e-bill service. Other
billers continue to send paper bills in addition to your electronic bills. Some billers let you
choose whether you want to receive just your electronic bills or both electronic and paper
bills. You will want to check with the biller to see what your option are.
Adding an Electronic Version of Your Bill
Some billers require your e-mail address when you add an electronic version of your bill. For
other billers, this information is optional. However, a biller may use your e-mail address to
contact you if there is a question about your payment or to inform you that your bill is ready.
To add an electronic version of your bill in bill pay:
1. If an e-bill is available for this biller, click on the e-bill icon in bill pay. The icon is an 'e' with
the words 'sign up' in a green box with an arrow.
Click the e-bill enrollment icon, then type the information required by the biller in the pop
up window.
The biller may require information such as your Social Security number to verify your
identity. The biller may also require you to enter your account number again. You will
most likely want to have a paper bill handy so you can enter your account number as it
appears on your bill.
Tip: If you must re-enter your account number, be sure to enter it exactly as described
based on the prompt given by the biller. The biller may require additional information to
activate electronic bills for your account.
2. Select one of the following options for receiving e-mails:
• If the biller can send electronic bills through e-mail, you can select Always e-mail my
bill to me.
• If you only want notification of your first electronic bill, select Only e-mail me to
notify me when my first bill arrives.
• If you don't want any e-mail notifications for your electronic bills, select No, thanks.
Review your e-mail address and type a new one if necessary.
Note: If you type a new e-mail address, you change the address that we keep in your profile and
use to send you any correspondence about your Bill Pay service.
If the biller lets you choose whether to receive both electronic and paper bills, or if the biller
offers an e-bill trial, select the option for the type of bills you want to receive.
If the biller's Terms & Conditions appear on this page, review the information and select the
box to indicate that you've read and agree to them.
If your service address information appears on this page, verify that it matches the address
where the biller provides your service. Make any changes to the address to match your billing
records.
Click Add Feature.
We send your request to the biller. A confirmation message appears, which provides additional
information about your request.
Click Finished.
The Payment Center opens.
When you start receiving electronic bills, an electronic bill icon appears next to the biller
name in the Pay Bills section of the Payment Center. You can also find electronic bill
information in the Payment Assistant. You can click the electronic bill icon, or e-bill links in
the Actions section of the Payment Assistant, to view and pay your bill.
18. How do I change my subscription plan? (i.e. change to from a
quaterly, annual, or biannual plan to a different one)
To change or get information about your subscription, please chat with a customer service
representative by clicking on the Support icon within the application. On the support page,
click on Live Chat. Enter the issue you are chatting about (i.e.: change plan, change
subscription, subscription question, etc) and get connected with a live representative on chat.
Please remember, the subscription change you request will be in effect after your current
subscription expires. This means that if you are on the quarterly plan, and wish to change
your subscription to the annual plan, you will be billed for the annual plan at the end of the
quarter you have already paid for, it will not be immediate. You will be billed the annual rate
at the end of your current quarterly subscription instead of being billed the quarterly plan
amount.
If you are still unsure after reading this article, feel free to chat with a representative by
clicking on "live chat" in the upper right hand corner of this screen.
19. Account to account transfers
Whenever money is moved between two accounts that are listed in the Spending Accounts
pane on the bottom left side of the application, we will need to process this as an account
transfer. We should receive two transactions, one from each account.
There are two options for assigning an account to account transfer, the video above shows the
latter option:
1.) You can assign the deposit into account A and the payment out of account B to the
"account transfers" envelope. This will update both of your spending account balances in the
lower left.
2.) You want to drag one - and just one - of either of these two transactions down to the
account in the spending account section in the lower left that matches the account that this
transaction lists on itself (this can be found in the Account column on the far right of that
transaction in the new transactions folder). This will bring up an account transfer window.
Choose the other account that is involved in this transfer, and click OK. This will create the
transaction in both accounts, and update both account balances. The other account that you
chose in the transfer window will show a Pending Transaction of this transfer which we will
want to match to the remaining New Transaction. Click once on the pending transaction, and
once on the downloaded transaction, and click on "Match".
*Special Note: If you are transferring between a checking account and a savings account, you
will need to take an additional step. It is necessary that you also perform an envelope to
envelope transfer between the savings envelope and the Income Cash Pool.
20. How do I resolve an error 103?
The error 103 means that when the program went out to gather transactions, it received an
error message from the financial institution's web site stating that the login credentials are
invalid. Since we do not wish to lock the account at the financial institution's web site, the
program locks the account from gathering transactions until the login credentials have been
updated in the application. To correct this problem:
1) Please login to the application
2) Click the 'Manage" button in the Spending Accounts section.
3) Next, click on the small pencil icon next to the account that is failing.
4) Update your username and password here and click Submit, then Submit again.
5) Once finished you can have the program check for new transactions by clicking on the
Update button (two circular arrows icon) next to your account.
6) You will know that the accounts have updated when the "Last Update:" time stamp shows
today's date and time.
7) Click Finish
21. How do I manually update an account I have added to the
application (force an update)?
To manually update all accounts, click the Refresh button from within the Spending
Accounts pane on the bottom left. Alternatively, you can select Manage under Spending
Accounts and Click "Refresh All Accounts".
If you would like to update an individual account:
1.) Click on "Manage" in the Spending Accounts Register.
2.) Click on the two blue arrows in the shape of a circle next to the account you wish to
update.
22. How do I add an offline account?
To add a new offline account or manually enter an online account, click "Add" in the menu at
the top of the Spending Accounts section in the left windowpane.
Alternatively, you can click "Manage," which will pop up the Account Manager window, and
you can then click "Add Another Account."
Either of these methods will bring up the Add Accounts Wizard.
Select the Create Custom Account option. The Offline Account Setup window will appear.
Enter the account information and click "Finish." The new account will now appear in your
Account Manager and Net Worth windows as an offline account.
23. How do I access reports?
You can access the reports by clicking on the "Reports" icon at the top of the application.
Once the Reports window pops up, select the type of report you want to generate: Envelope
Reports, Account Reports or Spending Plan Reports.
All the available reports of that type will appear in the right side of the window. Highlight the
desired report by clicking on it once.
Depending on the report you choose, you can determine the time period and type of
envelopes or accounts to include in the report. You can also choose to generate the report in
an Internet browser, a PDF file, or a spreadsheet. When you are ready, click "Show Report"
to generate and view your report.
You can create the following reports:
Envelope Reports
• Current Envelope Balance Report - Current balance by envelope
• Cash Flow Report - Cash in and cash out by envelope
• Spending by Month Report - Summary of monthly spending by envelope
• Transactions Report - Transactions by envelope
• Monthly Funding and Spending Report - Compare spending plan, funding, and spending
Account Reports
• Transaction by Payee Report - Find transactions by specific payee
• Account Register Report - Transactions and balances by account
• Deposit Account to Envelope Comparison Report - Sum comparison of all deposit balances
to all envelope balances
• Net Worth Statement - Sum of total assets and liabilities
Spending Plan Reports
• Spending Plan Report - Show detail of current Spending Plan
• Funding Plan Report - Show all funding profiles
Quicken Reports
If you have imported Quicken Data in the application, this option will be enabled to generate
Quicken Reports. You can run two types of reports on the data:
• Transaction by Payee Report– This report allows you to search all transactions by payee.
You can search a specific account or all accounts, and you can select a specific time period to
search.
• Account Register Report – This report will show transaction details as well as a running
balance during a specified time period.
24. I just added my account, why do I not have any new
transactions?
When you first add your accounts, the application retrieves your Starting Balance. The
Starting Balance will include all transactions that have cleared the bank before you added the
account. The transactions themselves will not download, but they will be counted in the
Starting Balance. The soonest you will get new transactions in the new transactions folder
will be the day after you added the account.
25. What do I do with the Starting Balance?
When you add your financial accounts, the current balance is retrieved from each of the
spending accounts you add. This current balance is termed your "Starting Balance," and a
transaction representing this amount will appear in your Income Cash Pool.
To divide this amount among your envelopes, click the Fund icon.
This will bring up a funding window with two options:
•
•
The first option allows you to manually decide how to allocate your money,
determining the amount to put in each envelope. You can manually enter in an
amount for each envelope or the percentage of the total amount available to fund. You
should include amounts you plan to spend and amounts you plan to save. At the
bottom of the screen, you can see the total amount in the Income Cash Pool, the total
amount you have entered to divide among your envelopes, and the difference between
the two. The difference automatically updates as you enter in your envelope amounts.
The second option allows you to select a funding profile if it has been created
previously. Profiles are created manually or automatically by your monthly Spending
Plan and Funding Plans.
Starting Balances for spending accounts (typically one or more checking accounts) should be
allocated to your envelopes. We recommend creating a Savings Group with multiple Savings
Envelopes that represent the balances in your savings account(s) as these balances are not
part of your day to day spending.
When finished, click "Fund" or "Cancel."
26. Why do you need my security questions and answers?
The Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council required that all financial institutions
implement multi-factor authentication into their login process by the end of 2006.
So that we can interface with a financial institution correctly, we need to securely capture
both the security questions and answers, along with any other validation steps, such as an
image verification or on-screen keyboard, that are used for this financial institution.
Once we receive the information, our engineering department can customize our software
script to include the proper handling of your additional login information. This will then
allow you to connect your financial institution to our application without error.
27. How do I update my billing information?
If you need to update your credit card number:
1. At the top of the application, Select "My Account", and then "Subscription and Personal
Info."
2. This displays a pop-up window. Click Payment, update your credit card information.
3. Click on 'Enter & Submit'.
If you need to update your street address, email address, or last name, please chat in with
Customer Service by clicking on the Support icon within the application. On the support
page, click on Chat with Support link. Enter the details and get connected with live help.
If you would like to change your subscription plan, please chat with a live representative.
28. How to assign finance charges?
Credit cards accounts and some lines of credit will post the interest fee, or the cost of
borrowing, as a separate transaction referred to as the finance charge.
In our application, we have a Finance Charges system envelope already created for you. All
finance charges from your credit cards or lines of credit should be assigned to this special
envelope.
You'll notice when you assign a finance charge, it will only impact the balance of the credit
card or line of credit the fee is associated with, it does not impact the value of your envelopes.
In order to effectively pay down your credit card by a certain principal value, you want to
make sure you fund your Money For envelope with the amount of principal you intend to
drop the balance of the credit card by, in addition to the finance charge assessed to your
account.
For example:
If you intend to pay down your credit card by $100 and you are hit with a finance charge of
$25 every month, you should be funding your Money For Credit Card envelope $125.
29. What is the cost of Bill Pay?
Bill Pay access is included free with your subscription. You are given 15 transactions free of
charge per month. Each additional transaction is 50 cents.
The Bill Pay monthly cycle is based starting on the date of Bill Pay enrollment, and not a
calendar month.
30. Why am I missing transactions?
Missing transactions can occur for several reasons; following are the most common causes:
1) An aggregation problem
2) The original transactions were unintentionally (or intentionally) deleted.
1) An aggregation problem:
Account aggregation involves compiling information from different accounts, including bank
accounts, credit card accounts, investment accounts, and other consumer or business
accounts, into a single place. This may include a database or may be provided through
"screen scraping" where a user provides the requisite account-access information for an
automated system to gather and compile the information into a single page. [Screen scraping
is a technique in which a computer program extracts data from the display output of another
program.]
If there are difficulties in the aggregation process, and the application is not downloading all
of your transactions, you need to chat with a customer service representative by clicking on
the Support icon within the application or the "chat live" icon in the upper righthand corner of
this window. Enter a description of the issue you are having (i.e. missing transactions) and
get connected with a live representative to troubleshoot and if necessary, open a trouble
ticket.
2) The original transactions were deleted:
If you have missing transactions because they have been deleted, you can enter them
manually by using the "Pending Transactions" pane. You can then manually clear them. (See
answer Creating Manual and/or Pending Transactions)
31. I am getting an authentication error, what should I do?
The Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council (FFIEC) has required that all
financial institutions implement multi-factor authentication into their login process by the end
of 2006.
So that we can interface with this correctly, we need to securely capture both the security
questions and answers, along with any other validation steps, such as an image verification or
on-screen keyboard, that are used for this financial institution.
In order to complete the resolution for this trouble ticket, we will need you to complete a
Provide Authentication Information form.
1. Login to the application.
2. In the Spending Accounts section on the lower-left, click Manage.
3. In the window that opens in the lower-right area click the link "Click here to provide
additional authentication information."
4. Fill out all the appropriate fields. Be sure to describe additional login information and
special instructions. If the information does not fit into the first field, then continue into the
next.
IMPORTANT: All of the security questions and answers are vital to the resolution of this
issue. If information is missing, the resolution of the issue will be delayed.
5. Click Submit.
6. Make note of the day and time.
7. Chat with product support to inform us that you have submitted this form. To chat with a
customer service representative you can click on the Support icon within the application. On
the support page, click on Live Chat. Enter the details and get connected with live help. They
will need the date and approximate time of submission.
Once we receive this information, our engineering department can customize our software
script to include the proper handling of your additional login information. This will then
allow you to connect your financial institution to our application without any issue.
32. Why do I need to manually authenticate each time I want my
transactions to download? OR How do I authenticate my accounts?
Some financial institutions use a multi-factor authentication process that we cannot
automatically interface with. Unfortunately, this requires a manual authentication process.
Here is the process to authenticate your accounts:
1. You should see an exclamation mark next to the accounts which should be authenticated.
Click on it. (Sometimes you get the Account Notification as soon as you sign in your
application.)
2. You should then get the Account Notification alert.
3. This alert will ask you, 'Would you like to attempt authentication?'
4. Click on Yes.
5. If you have setup security questions at the bank's website, you will be asked security
question(s). If your financial institution has setup to send an activation code to your email
address, you will receive an activation code in your email. If there is any image setup, you
will be shown the image to identify. These security measures would depend on different
financial institutions.
6. You need to either answer the security questions OR enter the activation code OR identify
the image.
7. Once you click on Submit, the accounts would authenticate and you would receive all the
transactions in the application.
33. What is the funding plan?
The Funding plan is designed to help you see how you will meet your monthly funding
goals on a paycheck-by-paycheck basis. Sometimes, the funding plan is referred to as a
paycheck profile beacuse you are planning how each paycheck will be funded in order to
meet your spending plan goals.
Creating a Funding Plan: The Monthly View of your Spending Plan is the same as your
Funding Plan, so you will need to be in the 12 Month View to take advantage of the
functionality of the Funding Plan. If you are in the Monthly Average View, switch to the 12
month view from the drop down menu by clicking on "View" and then clicking on "12 Month
View".
Once you are in the 12 Month View, select the month that you wish to create a Funding Plan
for, and click the "Funding Plan" button. The Funding Plan window will appear.
Your monthly funding amount will be listed in the first column, and each of your pay dates
for that month will be displayed in a separate column. (This is based on the income
information you entered in your Spending Plan.)
Click on any cell to edit it so you can allocate exactly how each paycheck will be spent.
When you're finished, click "Save." You'll be asked whether you want to save the plan “for
this and all future months”, OR “for this month only”.
If you have regular paychecks and pay periods, you may find it helpful to save the plan for
"this and all future months."
After you have saved your plan for all future months, you can still edit some months
individually. For example, if you get paid weekly or every two weeks, you will have an
"extra" paycheck in some months. Your income for some months may also be different if you
receive an annual bonus or a holiday gift, or if you receive some periodic income.
Custom Profile:
You can open the profile for any unusual months, edit it, and save it using the "save for this
month only" option.
You can also create a funding profile from within the funding (or income deposit
options) window. To do this,
1. Click on the Fund icon
2. Fund the amounts you want in the envelopes for the profile you are creating
3. Click on the "Save Profile" button in the upper right hand corner of the funding (or income
deposit options) window
4. Enter a name for the profile
5. Click on Save
If you have the amount of your profile available in the Income Cash Pool, you will be able to
click on "Fund" and actually fund the entered amounts into the envelopes.
34. How do I reconcile my accounts?
To reconcile your accounts:
1. Click on the respective account listed under Spending Accounts pane. In the account
register, select the "Reconcile" option at the top of the account register.
2. You will need to enter required details in the provided fields.
3. If you are reconciling Checking account, you will be asked to enter the beginning balance
and the ending balance that appears on your statement. If you are reconciling credit card
account, you will be asked to enter Charges, Cash Advances, Payments, Credits and Ending
Balance.
4. Click " OK".
You will see the transactions that were downloaded into the application within the dates
selected. You will have the option to check or uncheck the transactions as you find (or do not
find) them on your paper statement.
Reconcile tip: Remember that transactions will usually not download into the
application until the day after they clear the bank.
Alert: Once an account is reconciled, it cannot be unreconciled, so please use caution as
you reconcile your account.
35. Mvelopes mobile
In order to use Mvelopes Mobile, you will need:
•
an internet-enabled mobile phone or hand held device that supports WAP 2.0 or
native internet browsing (most internet-enabled mobile phones now meet this
requirement)
•
a data plan on your internet-enabled mobile phone or hand held device*
We also recommend a minimum screen size of 128 x 128 pixels to avoid formatting issues.
The mobile access is free to all subscribers, there is no registration necessary. Once you have
set up the application on your computer, you can access your information via your internet
enabled mobile phone or hand held device.
To get started, simply enter the URL m.mvelopes.com into the browser on your mobile
phone or hand held device. To log in, enter your Mvelopes username and password just as
you would from your computer.
36. Mobile features and capabilities
Once you have logged into the application on your mobile phone, you have the ability to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set your preferences
View envelope balances
View account balances
View and assign new transactions
View and match pending transactions
Enter manual transactions
Perform envelope to envelope transfers
Assign account to account transfers
* Regular charges for internet usage on your mobile phone may apply. Contact your mobile
phone service provider with specific questions about your phone or your plan and any related
charges for accessing the internet via your phone.
37. Why hasn't the bill I scheduled to be paid in Bill Pay actually
been paid?
To resolve this issue, you need to chat with product support. To chat with a customer
service/product support representative, you can click on the "chat live" button at the top of
this window, or you can click on the Support icon within the application. On the support
page, click on Live Chat. Enter information about the isue you are having (i.e. bill not paid)
and get connected with a live representative.
38. What is the Spend Plan?
Your Spend Plan (also referred to as the spending plan) is a map of how you intend to spend
your money each month. This should include monthly and periodic spending requirements,
debt reduction, as well as savings and investments. The Spend Plan icon will launch the
spending plan window where you will enter the amounts of your various incomes, create your
spending plan, and enter your funding, or income allocation, plan. It is essentially your
budget - where you plan to spend your money for that month.
To make changes to your Income, spending plan, or funding profiles, you will need to enter
the spending plan context by clicking on the Spend Plan icon
of the page.
in the tool bar at the top
Once the Spending Plan window is open, simply make the desired changes and click "Save."
Whichever view you are in—the Monthly Average View or the 12-Month View—will
automatically become the default view the next time you open the spending plan.
39. How do I use a HELOC account as my primary spending
account?
Note: Our application is primarily designed to handle funding from deposit accounts or actual
cash, just like the traditional envelope system. The following article provides work arounds to
allow funding from a source of credit. This is not our recommendation but we have chosen to
make this information available to address questions related to funding from sources
of credit.
A HELOC (Home Equity Line Of Credit) is essentially a line of credit homeowners can draw
from in the form of checks, special credit cards or other means. Depending on what you
would like your Income Cash Pool to represent, the application can handle a HELOC
spending account in one of two ways:
(1) If you prefer your Income Cash Pool to represent all of your available credit, you'll
need to create a manual deposit into the HELOC account that reflects the amount of
credit you have available. Here's an example of how it works:
1. Let's say you start with $10,000 in available credit. First make a manual deposit into the
HELOC account for $10,000 and assign it to the Income Cash Pool envelope:
2. Next adjust the Starting Balance by a negative $10,000 (the financial institution that you
have the HELOC with does not owe you $10,000, you owe them $10,000). This will force the
online balance to match the register balance, thus giving you a more accurate picture of your
finances:
3. All HELOC purchases will post inversely (oppositely) in the Money For
envelope. However, this creates a situation where the "Money for HELOC" envelope
inaccurately tracks the amount of money you intend to pay back on the loan each month. To
correct that, create a separate envelope to assign payments you make to the HELOC account.
4. The custom envelope you created has the same purpose as the Money For envelope, but
since all transactions post inversely in the system Money For envelope, there will be an extra
step required to keep your balances accurate. First, ensure your intended payment amount is
funded to your custom envelope. When you make a payment to the line of credit, assign both
the payment from checking and the deposit to the line of credit into your custom envelope.
This will update the balances in your Spending Accounts Register. To get the funds out of
your custom envelope, which have already been spent, transfer the value of the payment out
of the custom envelope and into Money For: Line of Credit.
(2) If you prefer the Income Cash Pool to represent the amount of credit you intend to
use in the current month, the second method may be more to your liking. Here are the
steps to make it work:
1. First, create a manual deposit reflecting the amount of credit you intend to make available
during the current month and adjust the HELOC Starting Balance accordingly.
2. Everything else when using this method is identical to the previously mentioned method.
This means that the "Money for HELOC" envelope will still be inaccurate, so you'll need to
create a separate envelope to allocate payments made to the HELOC account. So again, if
you plan on using $500 of your available HELOC credit in a given month, make a manual
deposit to the HELOC account for $500. Then to make the register balance match the online
balance, simply adjust the HELOC spending account Starting Balance.
Once you are done using credit as a source of funding:
You'll notice the Money For envelope will stay negative by the original amount of the deposit
we created in step 1. Once the line of credit is paid off, you'll need to delete this deposit,
which will bring your Money For envelope up to zero at this point, then adjust your line of
credit starting balance back to its original value (increase by amount of the deposit you
created).
To create a manual transaction:
1. Go into the "New Transactions" folder.
2. At the bottom of the New Transactions screen locate the "Pending Transactions" section.
3. Click "New" underneath the word "Pending," enter a payee (deposit from HELOC), select
an envelope (Income Cash Pool) and enter the amount you plan on using (or the amount of
credit you have available).
4. Select the HELOC as the account and then click "Save."
5. You can adjust the Starting Balance by double clicking on the "Starting Balance"
transaction and adding the difference to the original Starting Balance and clicking "Save."
For example: If the original Starting Balance is -$200,000 and you intend to use $500 of
your credit for spending, you would double click on the "Starting Balance" and edit it to
display -$200,500.
40. What type of accounts should be visible in the spending
accounts area?
The Spending Accounts section only shows spending accounts (accounts you can spend
from): Checking, Savings, Credit Card, Line of Credit, and Cash accounts. Accounts such as
loans, investments, and mortgages are only seen in the Net Worth summary. To deal with
these accounts, create a new envelope for each of these accounts, and treat them like any
other expense.
To access your Net Worth summary, click on Tools>Net Worth.
41. I recently returned a purchased item back to the store and now I
have received a deposit to my account. Where do I assign this
deposit transaction?
Simply assign the deposit transaction reflecting the returned item into the envelope in which
the original purchase was assigned. For example, if you returned an item of clothing, you
would put the refund transaction into the clothing envelope because this money was spent
but returned to you, and therefore can be considered money that was not spent from that
category. The deposit transaction will void the original purchase transaction.
42. What is the Income Cash Pool and what does its Balance
represent?
The Income Cash Pool is essentially a "holding" envelope, where you can store your
paycheck or other income until you are ready to fund (divide it) to your spending envelopes.
The Income Cash Pool balance represents unassigned money; that is, money that has not been
funded to your individual envelopes (i.e. groceries, clothing, mortgage, etc.).
Bonuses or unplanned income should also be assigned to the Income Cash Pool so that you
can determine where you would like to fund (and spend or save) this income.
43. How are the balances displayed in the Spending Accounts
Register calculated?
The balances displayed in the Spending Accounts Register are the sum of all assigned
transactions. They are not the balances provided directly by your financial institution. Online
balances can be seen in the Net Worth option, Account Manager window, and in the account
register under Online Balance field.
Once all transactions have been assigned, the balances displayed in the Spending Accounts
Register should be correct unless you have pending transactions at your financial institution
that have not yet cleared and downloaded into the application.
44. I cannot see the entire application window, what can I do to
resolve this issue?
This issue is usually related to the screen resolution being set too low. Yours is likely set to
800x600 pixels or lower.
For Windows users:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Display icon.
OR
1. Right click on a blank area of the desktop.
2. Left click on Properties option.
3. Click the Settings tab.
4. Move the Screen Area slider to select the resolution. You can move it upto 1024X798.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Click the OK button to confirm the change.
7. Click the Yes button if you want to keep the setting.
Note: If you cannot see the screen wait 15 seconds and it will revert to the previous settings.
8. Click the OK button.
For Windows XP users:
1. Click Start > Control Panel.
2. Click on Appearance and Themes.
3. Click on Display icon. This will bring up “Display Properties” with “Settings” tab.
4. Click the screen resolution slider bar and drag it one click to the right, so that the setting
shows 1024x768. Click OK.
There will probably be two prompts that you need to click to confirm. Once that is complete,
switch back to the application. You may need to sign out and sign back in the application.
For Windows Vista Users:
1. Open Display Settings by clicking the Start button Picture of the Start button
2. Click Control Panel
3. Click Appearance and Personalization
4. Click Personalization
5. Click Display Settings
6. Under Resolution, move the slider to the resolution you want, and then click Apply.
Or
1. Right click on your desktop
2. Click Personalize
3. Display Settings
4. Under Resolution, move the slider to the resolution you want, and then click Apply.
For Windows 7 Users:
1. Right-click an empty spot on your desktop.
2. Click Screen Resolution
3. In the Control Panel'Appearance and Personalization'Display'Screen Resolution window,
click on the “Resolution” drop-down list.
4. Slide the slider up and down to the right resolution
5. Then click out of the slider and click OK.
6. Accept the new settings, or cancel to revert to the previous settings.
For MAC Users:
1. Open the System Preferences (either from the Dock or from the Apple menu).
2. Select the Displays icon.
3. In the list of Resolutions: select 1024 x 768 (or higher).
4. Quit or close the System Preferences when done.
45. How do I reconcile an offline account?
The Reconcile function is designed to help you reconcile your account against a paper
statement for online account(s), and to reconcile the balance against cash on hand for offline
account(s). If you reconcile your accounts monthly, you can ensure that you have the most
accurate data.
To start the reconcile process, select the offline account you want to reconcile from the
Spending Accounts section in the lower left corner of the screen and click once on the
account to bring up the account register. Then click "Reconcile" in the menu at the top of the
right windowpane.
The Reconcile Offline Account window will appear.
Enter the amount of cash you have on hand, the date, and the envelope that you want to credit
or debit for the difference. Click "OK" when you have completed this. The system will record
a transaction in your account register and in the register of the applicable envelope.
46. Why do I need an Envelope to represent my savings account?
The purpose of the savings envelope is to reflect how much you are saving. We do not want
to think that our savings account money is money that we will be using to pay our bills on a
regular basis, and accidentally fund it into our spending envelopes. By creating an envelope
for the savings account, we can see that we have this money, and that it is accounted for,
while at the same time not considering it as part of what we are going to spend.
The sum of the envelopes must always be equal to the sum of deposit accounts. If we have
deposit accounts that set funds aside for the purpose of saving, then we would need
counterpart envelopes to set aside these same funds in the envelopes.
So, whenever we move money around between the deposit accounts, we also want to move
money around in the envelopes to reflect the reassignment of funds.
If funds were transferred from your Savings account to the Checking account, then let's do an
envelope transfer from the Savings envelope to the envelope that corresponds with how the
funds will be spent.
If the funds will be spent on multiple items, then transfer to the Income Cash Pool, and then
manually fund accordingly
If we transferred to the Savings account, then we will want to fund or transfer to the Savings
envelope to match.
47. I received cash back from a debit card purchase, how do I
handle this transaction in the application?
This should be handled like a split transaction.
1) First, let's say we have a Grocery envelope with a balance of $50.00 and a downloaded
transaction of $60.00 of which, $40 is groceries and $20 is cash back.
2) Highlight the transaction and click Split
3) Select the Grocery envelope then enter $40
4) Select the envelope that you spend the cash on or make a cash envelope and enter $20
5) Click OK
48. I forgot my username/password, what can I do?
If you have forgotten your username or password, please open the following URL and select
"Click Here":
https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/main?accessCode=P003001001
It will take you to the "Forgot Password" page https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/forgotPasswd. If you forgotten your username,
select "Click Here" in the "Forgot Password" page. You should be redirected to
https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/forgotUserName
If you have forgotten both username and password, you need to contact us through Live Chat.
Click on “Need more help logging in?” link. You will be connected to a live chat
representative after entering your personal information.
49. What are the different envelope types?
There are four types of envelopes that are each associated with a different type of spending.
These four types are: monthly required, monthly discretionary, periodic required, and
periodic discretionary. Each envelope that you create will have one of these four
designations. The envelope type can be changed by clicking on the Edit button in the menu
bar. First, select the envelope you wish to change, then click the Edit button. A Create/Edit
Envelope box will appear, and you can select any of the four options.
Monthly Required – This type of spending envelope refers to accounts for which you have
payments every month; often they are set amounts that rarely fluctuate. Examples of Monthly
Required spending envelopes are your mortgage or rent, power bill, gas bill,
water/sewer/garbage bill, cable bill, auto or student loan payments, credit card payments, and
monthly membership fees.
Monthly Discretionary – This envelope type refers to the monthly expenses where there is a
little more flexibility in the amount that can be spent. Examples of Monthly Discretionary
spending envelopes are auto fuel, babysitter, entertainment, clothing, groceries, and personal
items. These items are not necessarily dispensable, but there are often ways to cut spending
or save money in these categories. These are also the spending envelopes that you would
likely make transfers between if you needed to make an envelope-to-envelope transfer.
Periodic Required – This type of envelope is an account from which you don't have
payments every month, but from which you are required to make payments during the year.
Examples of Periodic Required spending envelopes are car registration, homeowner’s
insurance, property tax, and life insurance. Payments like these are less likely to affect your
monthly spending plan in a negative manner if you accumulate the total amount due a little at
a time each month.
Periodic Discretionary – This type of envelope is an account for which you don't have
payments every month, but for which you are planning to have expenses during the year.
Examples of Periodic Discretionary spending expenses are doctor visits, dental visits,
birthday and holiday gifts, vacation, car maintenance, and house maintenance. These are
expenses that you know you will incur and will be easier to budget for a little at a time. There
is some flexibility in the spending in these accounts, which allows you to make transfers
between envelopes when necessary.
50. How do I transfer funds between envelopes?
On occasion you may need to transfer funds from one envelope to another. For example, if
you need to make a purchase at the grocery store that will exceed the amount you have left in
that envelope, you can transfer funds from another envelope, such as the Eating Out
envelope, to cover the purchase. This will mean that you have less in the Eating Out envelope
and that you will need to cut your spending in that area.
To transfer between envelopes, click on the Transfer option from the Envelopes menu bar.
This will open the Transfer Window. Click the down arrow in the 'Transfer From' menu
display a dropdown list of your envelopes, and select the envelope from which you wish to
withdraw funds.
Follow the same process to select the appropriate envelope in the 'Transfer To' window.
Once you have selected the two envelopes that the transfer will affect, you will need to enter
the amount of the transfer. Do this by clicking once on the amount field and then typing in
the amount.
Once you have completed these steps above, click the OK button. This will record the
transfer on the envelope register of both envelope accounts.
If you click on the “Apply Entire Balance” option, the total envelope balance will be
transferred in the Transfer To: envelope.
51. How do I reverse or move a transaction assignment?
If you assign a transaction to the wrong envelope, or simply change your mind, it’s easy to
move it to another envelope.
First, select the transaction you wish to move. To do this, click on the envelope to which you
assigned the transaction. Once the register opens in the right windowpane, click on the
transaction you wish to move.
You can then reassign the transaction by simply dragging and dropping it to a new envelope.
This will move the transaction to the other envelope and automatically update the balance of
each envelope.
52. How do I split a single transaction between multiple envelopes?
Sometimes, you may have a transaction that affects more than one spending envelope. For
example, you may make a single purchase at a supermarket that includes food, bath and
beauty supplies, clothing, and photo developing. In this case, you will want to split up the
expense between multiple envelopes.
You can split a transaction in one of two ways:
1. Click on the transaction once to highlight it, and then select the Split button in the menu
bar.
2. Double-click the mouse button on the transaction and select the Split button from the
dropdown menu.
Either method will pop up a window where you then enter the envelope names and the
amounts to assign to each envelope. When you are finished, click "OK."
Note: If you make a purchase that includes "cash back," you can record the transfer to your
cash account as part of a split transaction. When you assign the appropriate line in the Split
Window, simply select the cash account in the Envelopes dropdown (it will be at the bottom
of your envelopes, after a space).
53. What is the Net Worth Summary?
The Net Worth Summary can be accessed by clicking on 'Tools' at the top of the application
and then clicking on 'Net Worth'.
The Net Worth Summary is a summary view of your assets and liabilities.
Your net worth, which is calculated by adding up the total value of all your assets and
subtracting the total value of all your liabilities, is one of the best indicators of your financial
health. The Net Worth Summary allows you to see all of your accounts so that you do not
have to hop around from website to website, or from paper statement to paper statement. You
can track your investments such as 401k, IRAs, or stocks. You can also track your mortgage,
auto loans, or student loans. If your net worth isn’t increasing, or isn’t increasing fast enough,
you know you need to make changes in your financial habits. .
Your Net Worth Summary is up-to-date as of the "Updated" date next to each of your
financial accounts.
54. How do I get started setting up my Net Worth Summary?
Before you can set up your Net Worth Summary you will want to gather statements from
your investment, retirement, and loan accounts. If you have not previously set up online
usage for each of these accounts, you will want to do that now by visiting the web site listed
on each of your statements. Make a note of your user name and password, as you will need to
enter that information as part of your Net Worth Summary setup.
55. How do I setup my Net Worth Summary?
Any time you add an Account, those accounts are automatically added to your Net Worth
Summary.
When you are adding an account, you are asked to select the account type.
If you select an option from the Spending Accounts category, such as "Checking Account" or
"Credit Card," then the account will appear in the left windowpane under the Spending
Accounts heading as well as in your Net Worth Summary.
However, if you select an option from the Net Worth Only section, such as "Investment" or
"Mortgage," then the account will only appear in your Net Worth Summary.
56. How do I make changes to accounts in my Net Worth
Summary?
If an account reported in your Net Worth Summary changes, you may need to update it in the
application.
Changing How the Account is Displayed
If your login ID or password for a financial institution account changes, you will need to
update it. You can change the login ID and password as well as how the account is named by
opening your Account Manager page by selecting "Manage" under Spending accounts and
clicking on the Edit button next to the account.
This will bring up an Account Setup window. Make the necessary changes, and click
"Submit." You will be asked to confirm the changes you make, and click "Submit" again.
Mvelopes will then update the account.
Making Changes to the Actual Account
If you want to make changes to the account itself, and not simply how it is displayed in the
Net Worth Summary, you will need to make those changes on the institution’s website. The
Net Worth Summary provides a link directly to the login page on the institution’s website for
most accounts.
In some cases you may simply need to go directly to the account’s website to make a change.
Simply enter the URL of the bank, creditor, financial institution, broker, etc. in your web
browser; then enter your username and password. Make whatever changes or transfers you
need to make. Your Net Worth Summary will automatically update with the new balance
information.
57. How do I fund when living paycheck-to-paycheck?
If you spend paycheck-to-paycheck and cannot yet fund your envelopes one month in
advance, the first time you put money into your envelopes you will want to put in only the
amount you will need to spend before your next paycheck. By minimizing your spending
each paycheck and setting aside the rest, you will soon have enough set aside to fund your
envelopes one month in advance.
In order to put the money into your envelopes for the first time, simply click on the fund icon
in the top toolbar.
This will bring up a funding window. Select the second option, and then enter in the amounts
for each envelope that you plan on spending before your next paycheck. When you are
finished, click "Fund" and the money will be divided among the envelopes based on the
amounts you entered. You are then ready to begin spending from these accounts.
You may also wish to use a funding plan to help you meet your monthly funding goals on a
paycheck-by-paycheck basis. The funding plan feature available within the Spending Plan
will allow you to create a funding profile for each paycheck that you receive during the
month.
58. How do I start in the middle of the month?
Unless it is the beginning of the month, you will likely not be able to use one of the profiles
created in your spending plan the first time you put money into your envelopes. In this case,
you will have to manually fund your envelopes, entering in the amounts for each envelope
that you plan on spending before the end of the month.
In order to manually fund your envelopes, click the Fund icon at the top of the application.
This will bring up a funding window. Select the second option, and then enter in the amounts
for each envelope that you plan on spending before the end of the month. When you are
finished, click "Fund" and the money will be divided among the envelopes based on the
amounts you entered. You are then ready to begin spending from these accounts.
As you receive additional paychecks during the month, you can simply leave them in the
Income Cash Pool by selecting the first option in the funding window. Then, at the first of the
month, you can fund your envelopes for that month using the income from the previous
month.
59. How do I reconcile my online spending accounts?
The Reconcile function is designed to allow you to reconcile your account against a paper
statement. It is not designed to work with the real-time online balance. The Reconcile
function serves as a method of verification that Mvelopes and your bank have the same
information as of your last statement date. If you reconcile your accounts monthly, you can
ensure that you have the most accurate data.
To start the reconcile process, select the account you want to reconcile from the Spending
Accounts window in the lower left of the screen and click once on the account. Then click
"Reconcile" in the menu at the top of the right windowpane.
The Reconcile Online Account window will appear.
From your paper bank statement, enter the statement ending date and ending balance, as well
as the beginning balance if applicable. For credit card and line of credit accounts you will
need to input the total value of Charges, Cash Advances or debits other than the finance
charge and the total value of Payments or Credits.
Please keep in mind that you cannot reconcile an account if there are new transactions in
your Unassigned Transactions window that fall before the statement ending date. If you have
unassigned transactions, exit this context, assign the transactions, and then follow the steps
above to get back to this point.
Next, the Statement Summary window will appear.
Review the transactions and de-select items that are NOT on your statement. Your
Reconciled Balance and your Statement Ending Balance should equal a difference of $0.00.
If they do, click the Finish button and proceed on to your next task.
Make Adjustments
If you are showing a difference between the Reconciled Balance and the Statement Ending
Balance, then you will need to make adjustments. Adjustments can be made in three different
ways:
1. Make an Adjustment with a Manual Transaction – If you know why the balances
do not match (e.g., you accidentally deleted a transaction that you need, or didn't
create a transaction that you were supposed to) you can create a manual transaction
that covers the difference. To do this, click "New" in the menu bar at the top of the
Statement Summary window.
This will take you to the account register and open a new transaction line in which
you can enter the data. After completing this entry, click anywhere in the register and
the data will save. You can then follow the steps above to re-enter the reconcile
window.
2. Make an Adjustment to a Transaction – If there is an error in a transaction, you can
edit that transaction to make the difference equal zero. Select the transaction you want
to edit and then click "Edit" in the menu bar at the top of the Statement Summary
window.
This will take you to the account register and open the data line for that transaction for
editing. Make the necessary changes and then enter the reconcile context again by following
the steps outlined above.
3. Click the Finished Button – When you select the Finished button, if you have either a
positive or negative difference in your reconciled balance and your statement balance, the
system will pop up a window where you can enter an adjustment.
Enter the amount of the adjustment in this window and select the envelope to which you
would like to assign the credit or expense. A transaction showing the adjustment will appear
in the account register as well as the envelope register.
60. What is the difference between the Funding Plan and the
Spending Plan?
The main difference between the funding plan and the spending plan is that the spending plan
is essentially your monthly funding/spending goals - where you would like to see your money
go.
The funding plan is designed to help you see how you will meet your monthly funding goals
on a paycheck-by-paycheck basis. The funding plan allows you to decide how much from
each paycheck will go where.
61. Why doesn't my account register balance match what is listed at
my financial institutions site?
The most common cause for the register balance and the online balance not matching are
unassigned or unintentionally deleted transactions. If your balances are not matching, we
would want to make sure there are no unassigned transactions in your new transactions
register. If there are, assign them, and your balances should match. The second most common
cause are pending bill pay transactions, or other pending transactions in the application. If the
bill pay payment is an automatic reoccurring payment, you can go into bill pay and go to
"manage my bills", select the bill(s) that show in your pending transactions area from the
drop down menu, and then select to "update automatic payment" and then change the "show
as pending" option to No. You can change this back to yes after you compare your balances.
If the payment is not a reoccurring payment, you can select to temporarily not show the
transaction as pending by highlighting the pending payment in the "pending payments"
section of bill pay and then clicking on "change" and then selecting "no" in the show as
pending option. You can change this back to show as pending any time before they are
remitted after which the option is no longer available.
If you have no unassigned transactions and no pending payments currently in your pending
transactions, and your balances still do not match, you may want to check the financial
institutions website for any pending transactions that have not yet downloaded into the
application. If there are pending transactions, you can enter them manually as pending
transactions in the application, which will usually make the balances match. Once the actual
transaction downloads, all you have to do is match it with the pending one you created.
If the transactions are "missing" from the application, but are posted on the financial
institutions website, you can enter them manually using the pending transactions section, and
you can manually clear them. This tells the application that the transaction has cleared the
bank and takes the transaction out of the pending transactions section. You will also want to
chat with a live representative to troubleshoot the issue and if necessary, open a trouble
ticket.
If the balance is still not matching, there could be a technical issue that is not allowing us to
download transactions from your financial institution, and you may want to chat with product
support to do some troubleshooting. You can chat live with product support by clicking on
the "live help" option at the top of this window. A live chat representative will also be able to
help you make your register and online balances match.
62. Why should I use Bill Pay?
One of the ways we help you take control of your money is through the online Bill Pay
feature. As a subscriber, you can easily view and pay your bills online each month - no
hassles, no paper. We've partnered with the premiere bill pay provider in the country to make
sure your payments arrive securely and on time. You can pay anyone in the United States that
you would normally pay by check or automatic debit.
To take advantage of Bill Pay, click on the "Bill Pay" icon from within the application and
then click on "Enroll Me" on the following page. Once you've enrolled in Bill Pay and
confirmed your account(s), you can begin scheduling your automatic payments. That's it.
That's all it takes!
Still not convinced? Read below to find out some more benefits of online Bill Pay and how it
can help you automate your finances:
Transfer FundsTransfer funds to other financial accounts
Now there's no need to visit a bank in order to make a deposit, so you have more time to do
other things.
Unified Bill PayPay all your bills from a single location
With Bill Pay, there's no need to check each individual payee's Web site. This saves you the
hassle of jumping to multiple Web sites, and offers a concise, unified view of your financial
obligations.
Up To 15 BillsPay up to 15 bills each month with online Bill Pay
Your subscription includes 15 scheduled payments during each monthly cycle. If you
routinely pay more than 15 bills a month, additional transactions are only $0.50 each.
Strategic Scheduling
Schedule your bills to be paid the same day you're paid. With Bill Pay you can set up
reoccurring payments that happen when you get paid, or any day you choose. That way you
can stay on top of your monthly bills and have a better view of where your money is going.
Pay Anyone in the U.S.
Pay any individual or organization that can receive payment via check or automatic debit.
Bill Pay features the ability to pay any individual or organization online instead of taking the
time to mail a check to that payee. You can also pay someone who doesn't have online
statements – we'll mail the check to them.
Save Money On Postage
No more money spent on postage or trips to the post office.
Paying all your bills online in one place not only saves you money on postage each month, it
can drastically cut down on the number of trips you make to the post office.
Now's the perfect time to sign up and take advantage of everything Bill Pay can offer. And be
sure to watch for some exciting changes to Bill Pay in the coming months that will make it
even better! To get started, log in and click on the "Bill Pay" icon.
63. How do I delete an envelope?
If you need to delete an envelope, simply highlight the envelope and then click "Delete" in
the menu bar at the top left corner of the application (underneath the word 'Envelopes'). This
will allow you to control the number of envelope accounts in your Spending Plan. Since the
sum of your spending accounts must match up with the sum of your envelopes, the envelope
must have a zero balance before you can delete it. You can make the envelope have a zero
balance by performing envelope to envelope transfers.
If you wish to delete an envelope group, you will need to delete or ungroup the envelopes
currently assigned to that group before you will be able to delete the group.
64. How do I track investments in Mvelopes?
Most Mvelopes users know how easy it is to setup and maintain envelopes for everyday
checking, savings and credit card accounts. But it's also a breeze to do the same with
investment accounts - 401(k), IRA, mutual funds, stocks, etc. Using investment accounts
within Mvelopes will help you have a more accurate picture of your overall financial picture
and simplify the way you manage your money.
Within Mvelopes, the Spending Accounts windowpane lists the different spending accounts,
checking, savings, credit cards and similar accounts, that you spend from regularly.
Investments, however, are only seen in the Net Worth summary. So in order to track the
money you put into an investment account, you'll need to create a new envelope for that
account and treat it like a regular expense. If you have multiple investment accounts, you can
create an investment group with sub envelopes for each individual account:
1. To get started, click "New" in the envelope windowpane. Now click on the "Group Name"
drop down menu bar and then click on the "New" button. Enter the name you'd like
associated with that group (i.e. investments), and then hit "Save." Now you'll be able to create
envelopes within your group by entering the name you'd like for that envelope in the
"Envelope Name" field, selecting the group that you just created in the "Group Name" drop
down menu and hitting "Save." You can specify the minimum monthly contribution total for
each envelope you intend to create using the Spending Plan feature.
2. Once you receive the payment representing the transfer from your checking account (to the
investment account) in the New Transactions Register, simply assign it to the envelope
representing the investment account the funds were transferred to. If you funded the envelope
properly, it will be zeroed out each time you assign the payment (from your checking
account) transaction.
3. You can track the total value of an investment account at any time by clicking on the “Net
Worth” icon. If you think the account value may have changed since the previous update, you
can hit “Refresh” in the Spending Accounts Register to update all of the accounts globally, or
click “Manage” to access the Account Manager. From there you can refresh each account
individually.
As you fine tune your money management techniques, you’ll likely find extra cash remaining
in certain envelopes at the end of your funding period. To boost your investment account, this
extra cash can be transferred over to your investment envelope for a later transfer (this would
be the same as funding, only you would be transferring from one envelope to another to
‘fund’ the investment account envelope instead of using the Income Cash Pool as the
envelope you are funding from). So if you have $100 left over in your eating out envelope,
you can transfer that $100 to your investment account envelope, and then transfer that extra,
unused $100 from your checking account to your actual investment account.
66. What are the benefits of the new support portal?
In addition to the 24x5 Live Chat that has been offered in the past, the new support portal
includes a searchable knowledge base, which is referred to as 'Answers'. This section contains
solutions to the most commonly asked questions as well as solutions
for many common questions and technical issues that can usually be resolved quickly,
and without you having to wait for an available agent. You have the ability to print or e-mail
articles from within the support portal. New articles will be released often. You can also
judge an article's effectiveness in answering your question to help us continually evolve the
knowledge base.
The Ask a Question section is a replacement for e-mail support. It is a secure message center
where you may ask questions about the application or report a bank connectivity problem. To
view responses to your questions, click on the 'My Stuff' button, and then click on Questions.
The My Questions page will list all of your incidents, regardless of whether they have been
resolved or not.
You will also notice that the My Stuff section stores all of your Live Chat sessions within the
'My Questions' section. They may also be printed for easy reference.
Also see: Overview of New Support Portal
67. How do I assign a savings interest deposit transaction?
Simply assign the savings interest deposit to your savings envelope. The savings envelope
should always match the balance of your savings account.
68. What should I do with negative envelope balances in Mvelopes?
Given that Mvelopes is based on the tradional envelope method of money management, your
funded envelopes are the cornerstones for success with the system. They’re designed to show
exactly how much money you have available in any spending category. You’ll see that
checking your envelope balances before spending and assigning new transactions daily are
the easiest ways to stay on top of your finances.
And as long as you’re able to continue spending from within your envelope balances,
everything works great. But what happens if you overspend?
Say, for example, that your groceries envelope has a balance of $150 and you assign a
payment transaction of $200. You’ll see the envelope balance drop to -$50 and turn red to
indicate a negative balance. Before doing anything else in Mvelopes, you should either (1)
immediately fund that envelope back to at least $0 from the Income Cash Pool or (2) perform
an envelope-to-envelope transfer.
To perform an envelope-to-envelope transfer, click once on the envelope from which you
want to initiate the transfer then click “Transfer” in the envelopes toolbar. In the Transfer
Window, select the destination envelope from the “Transfer To:” drop down menu, type in a
note if you’d like, enter the amount of the transfer and click “Save.” *Note: You wouldn’t
want to perform an envelope transfer from an envelope representing funds from another
account, such as a savings envelope, you’d only want to perform the transfer from an
envelope funded from the same spending account.
Think of the red envelope as an alarm from Mvelopes, trying to prevent you from
overspending. Cancel the alarm by putting money (in this case, $50) into the envelope before
making your next spending decision. Because in reality the $50 has already been spent, and
no longer exists, so you need to decide from which area to cut spending. If you decide to
ignore negative envelopes before spending, you run the risk of an overdraft, due to the
resulting inaccurate balances of the envelopes that are in the black (the sum of the envelopes
is inclusive of any negative envelopes).
The one situation where it’s acceptable to temporarily carry a negative envelope balance is a
reimbursement expense. It’s recommended you create a custom envelope for reimbursement
expenses so they can be tracked separately from your personal budget. When you make a
reimbursable purchase, assign the payment transaction to your non-funded envelope. You’ll
notice that it will go negative. Once you receive the deposit reflecting the reimbursement,
assign it directly to the negative envelope if it is the exact amount of the initial purchase. If
the reimbursement is just added to your payroll deposit, be sure to fund the negative envelope
back up to zero. If you aren’t going to be reimbursed for a longer period of time, or need to
make a major purchase before you are going to be reimbursed, it may be best to fund the
envelope up to zero before spending. Keeping your envelope balances positive before making
spending decisions is the key to getting the most out of Mvelopes and changing how you
think about spending.
69. How do I allocate a certain percentage of my money to the
envelopes instead of an exact amount?
To fund using a certain percentage instead of an exact amount, we would simply click on the
"Fund" icon at the top of the application window. This will bring up the funding
window. We then would enter the desired percentage of the money that is in the Income Cash
Pool that we wish to be allocated to each envelope in the percentage box (i.e. 20, 10, 15, etc.).
The percentage box is found toward the right of the funding window, in between the column
"Amount to be funded" and the green check mark.
70. How do I track a gift card?
A gift card may be added as an Offline Account. Follow the steps below to add a gift card as
an offline account:
Step 1. First click "Add" in the Spending Accounts Register and then click on the "Create
Custom Account" button. This will bring up the 'Offline Account Setup' window:
Step 2. Type the desired name of the gift card in the "Account Name" field and select
"Checking" as the Account Type. Now enter the amount left on the gift card in the value field
at the bottom. You can fill out the "Institution Name" and "Account Number" fields, but
those are optional. Click "Finish" when you're done.
Step 3. By default, the gift card starting balance will be assigned to the Income Cash Pool.
But since the balance of the gift card is not actual cash, you'll need to create a custom folder
to move the starting balance to. Click on "New" in the envelopes window pane to bring up
the "Create/Edit Envelope" window. Now type in the desired name of the new envelope in
the "Envelope Name:" field. You may also want to assign the Envelope to a group. Click
"Save" when you're done.
Step 4. Click on "Income Cash Pool" in the envelopes pane so you can see the gift card
starting balance. You'll need to drag and drop this starting balance transaction into the
envelope you just created. This is to separate the gift card balance from the funds you'd
normally use for the rest of your budget, plus the fact that the gift card can usually be spent
at a particular retail store.
Step 5. Finally, to track your gift card purchases, simply create a manual transaction. First
select the envelope which represents your gift card and click "New" in the envelope's window
pane on the right. Click on the calendar icon to select the date of the transaction and enter a
description in the Payee field. Select the gift card account in the Account drop down menu
and enter the amount of the purchase in the Payment field.
71. I would like to be able to track due dates for payments. Is this
possible?
Your subscription includes a Bill Pay feature where you can set up one-time and/or recurring
payments. Unfortunately, at this time there is not an alert for due dates and amounts within
the application. When the scheduled bill-pay transaction clears your account, you will be able
to assign it to an envelope.
If you would like to see the effect of future transactions on your envelope and
account balances, we recommend creating a "Pending Transaction" for each scheduled
bill that is due within your planning period. If you are funding envelopes every two weeks
(paycheck to paycheck), include the bill pay transactions scheduled during that period. If you
fund your envelopes every month, include the bill pay transactions scheduled for the month.
When the transactions clear your account, we will automatically propose a match against the
transaction sitting in your Pending Transactions register.
72. How do I automatically assign transactions using the
Transaction Rules Manager?
Transaction Rules Manager
You can use the Transaction Rules Manager to automatically rename or assign your transactions as
they are retrieved.
1. First, select the Transaction Rules Manager under the Tools menu.
Any rules you have previously set up will be displayed. They will be applied in the order listed,
and you can change the order by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. You can also
choose to delete, edit, or immediately run a rule from this window.
2. To create a new rule, click the New button.
3. Create a name for your rule to help you remember it so you can manage it later.
4. Enter text in the "Payee contains" field. For example, if you want to create a rule to apply to all
your transactions from Mary's Clothing Store, you might enter "MARY" in this field. You can
click the plus sign button to add more "Payee contains" fields. For example, if you know that
your transactions from another branch of Mary's Clothing Store show up as being from
CLOTHSTOREPARENTCOTRANS#67893, you may wish to add another "Payee contains"
field for the same rule, and enter "CLOTHSTOREPARENTCO." You can use the minus sign
button to remove unwanted "Payee contains" fields.
5. Use the dropdown menu to select an action type.
• If you select "Rename Payee to," you may then enter the text you would like the
system to use when automatically renaming your applicable transactions. For
example, if you create a rule with "MARY" in the "Payee contains" field and "Mary's
Clothing" in the "Rename Payee To" field, then the system will automatically rename
a payee name retrieved as "MARYCLO247TRANS456" to "Mary's Clothing."
You will still be able to see the original Payee name when you mouse over a renamed
transaction until it is assigned.
•
If you select "Assign to," you may then select an envelope to which you would like the
applicable transactions to be automatically assigned, such as "Personal
Care:Clothing."
6. When you first log on, the system will show you any automatically assigned transactions in
the "Auto Assigned Transactions" register. Until you have accepted an automatically assigned
transaction, it will appear in bold text in both the Auto Assigned Transactions register and in
the envelope to which it was assigned. You can accept it by clicking on it. You may also
choose to accept all your automatically assigned transactions at once by selecting "Accept
All" in the Auto Assigned Transactions register.
7. If you don't agree with the way a transaction was automatically assigned, you can drag it to
your preferred envelope, or you can simply undo the assignment by dragging it to the New
Transactions register.
Please note: If you have created a pending transaction for a purchase that is set to be automatically
assigned, it will not be automatically assigned, it will need to be matched when the actual transaction
downloads from your financial institution.
73. How do I delete an account from Mvelopes?
To delete an online account perform the following steps:
1. Click Manage from within the Spending Accounts pane.
2) Click on the pencil icon, Edit, just left of the financial institution name in question. This
will open a "Modify Account" window.
3a) To delete all the accounts added, click on the "Delete Accounts" to delete all the accounts
you had added for this financial institution.
3b) To delete just one account, click on the red X button to the left of the account name to
delete. Click OK to confirm deletion.
To delete an offline account perform the following steps:
1. Click Manage from within the Spending Accounts pane.
2. In the Account Manager window, scroll down past the online accounts and look for the
offline account that you want to delete.
3. Click the red X symbol next to the offline account that you want to delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm.
74. What is the Income Cash Pool?
The Income Cash Pool is the source of all envelope funding. When you receive income
deposit transactions, you will assign them to the Income Cash Pool envelope, just as you
would assign a grocery purchase transaction to your Groceries envelope. No purchases or
finance charges should ever be assigned to the Income Cash Pool.
In traditional envelope budgeting, people would cash their checks, and then sit down with
their stack of cash and divide the cash into envelopes for their various spending needs. The
Income Cash Pool functions as that stack of cash, waiting to be divided among the envelopes,
and therefore represents any money that has not been allocated to an envelope. As income is
received, instead of being cashed it is placed in the Income Cash Pool to be divided among
the envelopes. It can be divided immediately, or it can sit in the Income Cash Pool until you
are ready to put it into your envelopes.The Income Cash Pool balance will not always match
your checking account balance, and, if you are carrying negative envelopes, will not
necessarrily be a reflection of funds you have available to spend. If you choose to put all the
money for all of your month’s expenses into your envelopes at one time, the Income Cash
Pool is useful to keep new income separate until the beginning of the next month when you
again put money into your envelopes.
75. What are the features of the support portal?
Support Home
From Support Home, you may search the knowledge base for an answer to your question.
The most popular answers are also visible on the support home page. You may also utilize
the "Ask a Question" feature to communicate with a product support representative if the
knowledge base is not helpful. The responses to all of your questions are available in the "My
Stuff" section; we'll go into more detail on this section later.
Answers
The Answers section is our knowledge base of article content relating to the product. You
may search the knowledge base for answers and even provide a rating and feedback based on
if you feel that an article does or does not answer your question. We encourage you to
provide feedback if an article is not helpful, as we are constantly trying to improve the
knowledgebase to better assist you.
Ask a Question
The Ask a Question section is a secure message center and a replacement for e-mail support.
It should be used if your question cannot be addressed from the knowledge base, but you do
no necessarily need an immediate answer. We strive to answer all questions within the next
business day. The response to your questions will be displayed in the "My Stuff" section.
Live Help
From Live Help, you may request a real-time chat with one of our product support agents. If
you are experiencing what you feel is a bug in the application, have a bank connectivity issue,
or a question that needs an immediate answer, Live Chat is available 24 hours a day 5 days a
week.
My Stuff
My Stuff stores all of your incident history. It is also a secure message center from which you
will receive replies from your "Ask a Question" incidents. In the event that a product support
agent needs to follow up with you after a chat session has been completed, you will receive
replies referencing the chat session and giving you information here as well. Every
interaction with a product support agent will create an incident. If we need more information
from you about an incident, you will see the request in the "My Questions" section of "My
Stuff". We are using My Stuff as a secure message center to avoid e-mail delivery problems.
If you think that you may have not received a reply to your question, be sure to check "My
Questions". We are currently not using the Notifications section.
76. How do I change my password?
To change your password, click on "My Account" in the top toolbar of the application,
directly above the Net Worth icon.
You will be presented with a window that will prompt you for your current password and will
allow you to change your password. The password change will become effective
immediately.
77. Bill Pay physical check sizes changing.
In an effort to increase their check printing efficiency, our Bill Pay partner, Checkfree (now
Fiserv), will institute "2-up" format check printing. Using this format will effectively double
their printing capacity and prepare them for future increases in print volume. In order to
implement 2-up printing, the size of the bill pay checks has been altered. While the height of
the check remains unchanged, the length has been decreased by roughly 1/2 inch to a new
size of approximately eight inches. The new check format was designed according to ANSI
standards for business checks. It has also passed testing from their originating banks to ensure
that the formatting is correct. Checkfree's Print and Insert group will begin printing the
smaller checks on May 15, 2008. These changes will be incorporated in both corporate and
draft checks.
Also, please note that the signature that appears on bill pay checks has changed. The new
signature of Tom Hirsch, Fiserv CFO began appearing on checks on May 12, 2008.
78. What does Mvelopes do to help my finances?
Mvelopes is essentially a powerful budgeting tool. It takes a proactive approach to managing
your money so that you can plan how and where you are going to spend your money before
you actually spend it. It gives you detailed information about your spending. Mvelopes is
designed to help you spend from within your net income and not your gross income which
includes pre-tax deductions.
Mvelopes Personal automatically downloads transactions for all of the online accounts you
add to it, as long as the financial institution is supported by our software. For accounts that
you do not have online access to, or accounts that are held at a non-supported financial
institution, you have the ability to add them as offline accounts and can track them manually
within the application.
Mvelopes Personal allows you to set up a spending plan, which is essentially a plan for how
you are going to allocate your money into different envelopes/spending categories. You can
change this plan to better meet your needs at any time. If you have a spending category that is
not listed as a default envelope, you can customize Mvelopes by adding your own
envelopes/spending categories. Once you receive your paycheck, you will need to fund your
envelopes based on your spending plan, or, if you are just starting, based on your required
expenses that will occur before you receive income again. As you assign your transactions,
Mvelopes will give you accurate, up-to-date information for each spending category and
account, showing the actual funds available for each category. Just assign your transactions to
the envelope which best represents the expenditure. (I.e. if you purchased groceries, you
would drag and drop the transaction into the grocery envelope). A negative envelope would
indicate that you have over spent in that particular category. A positive envelope would
indicate that you have under spent in that particular category (based on what you have
funded).
You can transfer between categories to cover accidental over spending in one category with
left over spending from an over-funded category. This will allow you to spend where you
would like to spend without necessarily overspending and/or incurring credit card debt. You
can also split a single transaction among different envelopes if you purchase items that
belong to more than one spending category in one spending trip.
The report feature within the application facilitates you in generating different reports based
on what you would like a report on. (I.e. spending month to date in one or more categories,
comparing your actual funding and spending to your spend plan, etc.) You can generate
reports for your accounts, envelopes on monthly and yearly basis, or within specific dates.
Reports can be obtained in PDF, Excel and html format, so that you can save them for future
reference.
79. Is my financial institution supported?
Mvelopes Personal supports more than 14,000 financial institutions so that you can get real
time account information at anytime. You can link as many accounts as you want, so you can
see all of your account balances and view every one of your transactions – expenses or
deposits – all in one place.
To see if your financial institution is supported, click on the following link.
http://www.mvelopes.com/overview/
Click on Supported Banks option on the left hand side pane. Enter your financial institution
and
click on "Go >". If your financial institution is supported, you will be able to see it in the
supported banks list.
80. What are the available subscription plans and rates?
There are three subscription plans available: the Quarterly plan, the Annual plan, and the
Biannual plan. The subscription charges are as follows.
1) Quarterly Plan: $39.60 automatically charged once every 3 months, equivalent to only
$13.20 per month
2) Annual Plan: $129.60 automatically charged once every year, equivalent to just $10.80 per
month
3) Two year Plan: $189.60 automatically charged once every other year - *Best Value*
equivalent to just $7.90 per month
81. How do I enroll?
You can enroll for Mvelopes and get a 14 day trial absolutely free. To register, log on to
http://www.mvelopes.com/ and select to start the free trial or click on the link below:
1) Click the link: http://www.mvelopes.com/
2) Click the Free Trial link at the top right corner under Member Login
Just follow three simple steps for signing up for a new account. Create your user name, select
your plan, and secure your free trial.
If you have any issues signing up from the link above, please contact us by clicking on the
live support icon from the same page, so that we can assist you in enrolling.
82. Can I enroll using my checking account or any other account?
Unfortunately, we do not have the ability to charge a checking account directly. If you do not
have access to a credit or debit card, you may consider purchasing a Visa or Mastercard prepaid debit card which can be used anywhere you see a Visa or Mastercard logo.
-83.
How do I import Quicken data?
You can import Quicken data into the application if you wish to do so.
Click on "File" at the top of the application, and then select "Import" and "Quicken Data"
from the drop down menus.
The limit for the file you can import is 2 MB and the transactions must be
imported one account at a time.
Please note that the data you import can only be used for reports, and will only be seen in the
reports. Unfortunately, Quicken data cannot be integrated with the application.
84. Can I change the startup view for my envelope groups? (How
my envelope groups look when I first log in)?
You can change the startup view so that you can see your envelope groups based on your
personal preference of seeing by default each individual envelope in that group or seeing the
lump sum of that group. To set these preferences:
1. Click on "File" at the top of the application, and select Preference.
2. Select Startup View.
3. Select the envelope groups to be expanded and the envelope groups remain closed upon
login.
4. Click Ok.
85. How do I change the envelopes I see in my Envelopes Quick
View screen?
You can customize the envelope quick view screen, which is the screen you see when you
first log in to the application after you have completed or chosen to not continue setup. You
can customize which envelopes you want to view in this list. To change the envelopes you
see in your quick view, please follow these instructions:
1. Click File, Preference.
2. Select Quick View.
3. Select the envelopes to be displayed in Envelopes Quick View.
4. Click Ok.
86. Can I change the period of dates that I see for all of my
envelopes and all of my accounts?
You can change the default date period of your transactions and accounts. To accomplish
this, follow these instructions:
1. Click on "File" at the top of the application, then select "Preference".
2. Select Registers.
3. Select the period of your choice from the drop down menu.
You can scroll up and down within the drop down menu to find the period that is most likely
to have the information you are looking for.
Your period options will be All dates, Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, Last 90 Days, Last 12
Months, Month to Date, Quarter to Date, Year to Date, Previous Month, Previous Quarter,
and Previous Year.
NOTE: This will become your new default setting and will be in effect every time you log in
to the application until it is changed again. To change it back to the default 30 days, or to
another period, just follow the steps above again and select the period you would like to use
as your default setting.
87. How do I enable or disable Support Authorization?
Occasionally, support agents may request you to enable support authorization. This gives the
agent the ability to look at your account to get a better understanding of the issue you are
experiencing. They will also request it when you request or agree to a reset (of the
application) to today.
To enable or disable support view, follow these instructions:
1. At the very top of the application, click File, Preference.
2. Click on the Support Authorization tab.
3. Click the bullet next to the "Authorize View" or "Do Not Authorize View" depending on
which of these you would like to accomplish.
4. Click OK.
The setting you choose will remain the same until you change it again by going back into the
menu and making the desired changes.
88. How can I change my password that I use to log in with?
To change your password:
1. Select "My Account" at the top of the application.
2. Click “Change Password”.
3. Enter the existing password,
4. Enter the desired new password
5. Confirm the new password.
89. How can I retrieve my user name and/or password if I have
forgotten one of the two or both?
You can retrieve a new password using this link:
https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/forgotPasswd
If you have forgotten your username, it may be obtained it from:
https://my.mvelopes.com/webapp/control/forgotUserName
If you have forgotten both your user name and password, you will need to chat with a
customer support agent in order to retrieve this information by clicking on the "Live Chat"
option in the top right corner of this screen. For security purposes, you will need to verify
some personal information related to your account with the representative.
90. How to reset everything to a particular date?
If you would simply prefer to start with DATE balance as the Starting Balance for each
account, then follow these steps:
1) In New Transactions, delete everything prior to DATE:
a) Click once on the first item to delete, and then, if necessary, scroll down, and then hold
down the shift key while clicking once on the last transaction.
b) Click Delete and then click to confirm.
2) Next, we need to delete all transactions prior to DATE except the Starting Balance
transaction from the account register. For this:
a) Click on the first account listed in the Spending Accounts windowpane on the bottom left.
b) On the top right, click to change the Period drop-down menu to All Dates, which is the
top-most selection.
c) Now, delete all other transactions prior to DATE besides the first transaction that reads
your account name and "Starting Balance" in the Payee field.
3) Once all other transactions are deleted, click on the Starting Balance entry, and click the
Edit button up above.
b) Change the date of the transaction to date you wish to reset your application to.
c) Then change the amount in either the payment field, if this is a credit account, or deposit
field if this is a deposit account.Change this amount to match the Online Balance at your
financial institution's website as of DATE.
d) Click Save.
4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 for every account.
5) Next, we need to find and delete any funding transactions from the Income Cash Pool. Do
not attempt to delete any starting balances, or anything that reads "Transfer From," or
anything that is not a funding transaction.
6) At this point, if you have any envelopes that are still negative, then go to each negative
envelope, and delete any envelope transfers that are present, from within the negative
envelope.
7) Then, fund your envelopes to reflect how your current funds need to be allocated, from
date until next pay day, or month, depending on your budget.
91. How to access Mvelopes Forum/Support Bulletin Board?
To access forum from the application, select Forum icon at the top right-hand corner of the
application. Enter user name and password, and login.
(or)
To access forum outside of the application, open "www.mvelopes.com". Enter user name and
password. Choose "Forum" under Community or select "Visit the Forum" icon.
Forum login credentials may be different from your Mvelopes account.
92. How do I create a new envelope?
You can create as many envelopes as you would like in the application. There is no limit to
how many envelopes you can have.
To create a new envelope:
1. Select "New" in the Envelopes pane in the upper left hand side of the application.
2. Enter the name for the envelope in the field provided.
3. Select the envelope type and if you would like this envelope to be sweep enabled.
4. Click on "Save".
93. How to create an envelope group?
For a new envelope and a new group:
1. Select "New" in the Envelopes pane.
2. Enter the envelope name.
3. Under "Group Name" drop down box, select New.
4. Enter the group name and click on 'Save'.
5. Click Save.
To create a new group (without creating a new envelope):
1. Click on "New" in the envelopes pane
2. Select "New" from the "group" dropdown menu.
3. Enter the name of your new group.
4. Click on "Save".
5. Click on "Cancel"
You will be able to see the group in your envelope categories (you just wont have an
envelope in that group).
To assign an existing envelope to the new group you created, simply click on the envelope
you want in that group, click on "edit" at the top of the envelopes pane, and select your new
group as the group for this envelope.
94. How do I edit an existing envelope?
You can edit the name of an envelope by clicking on the envelope so that it is
highlighted, and then follow the steps below:
1. click on "Edit" in the Envelopes pane.
2. Change the name for the envelope.
3. Change the group if needed.
4. Click on "Save"
95. How to fund an envelope?
To fund your envelopes (also called allocating to your envelopes), you will want to click on
the fund icon in the top toolbar. This will bring up the funding window.
The default option will be to 'manually fund one or more envelopes'. Type in the amount that
you would like to fund to each envelope in the 'amount to be funded column, or fill out a
percentage of the Income Cash Pool you want to be placed in that envelope in the percentage
box, or click on the 'remainder' check box to fund with the remaining amount for that
envelope which is based on your spend plan. After the amounts are entered into your
envelope(s), click on the word 'fund' in the lower left corner of the funding window.
The second option will be to 'fund using a saved profile'. You can only use this option if you
have created one or more funding profiles. Select the funding plan you would like to use from
the dropdown menu. The amounts of this funding profile will automatically populate in the
envelope(s), and then you just need to click on the word 'fund' in the lower left corner. To
learn how to create a a funding profile, please see knowledgebase article 'Creating a Funding
Profile: Overview'.
Remember, the application will not allow you to fund more than what you have available in
your Income Cash Pool.
96. How do I edit the existing funding profile?
You have three options to edit the funding profiles:
You can:
1. Select "Fund" in the Envelopes pane.
2. Select "Fund using a saved profile" and select the funding profile you would like to change
from your list of saved profiles.
3. Make the desired changes and click on "Save Profile" in the top right corner of the funding
window.
4. Enter a name for this profile
5. Click on "Save"
6. Click on "Fund" (to actually place the money in your envelopes).
Note: This will create a new funding profile in addition to the existing one.
OR if you would like to edit the existing funding profile without creating a new one:
In the Monthly Average View:
1. Click on the "Spend Plan" icon at the top of the application.
2. Change the amounts as desired in the Monthly Average Column by clicking on the amount
you wish to change and entering the amount you would like to change it to.
4. Click on 'Save'.
In the 12 month View:
1. Click on the "Spend Plan" icon
2. Click on "funding plan"
3. Find the funding plan that you would like to change.
4. Change the amounts as desired by clicking on the amount you wish to change and entering
the amount you would like to change it to.
5. Click on "Save"
97. How do I create manual transaction(s)?
To enter transactions manually, go to the New Transactions folder, and enter them in the
Pending Transactions section down below. Click New to create new charges, debits, checks,
or deposits. Click Account Transfer for credit card payments and account transfers. Once the
transactions clear the financial institution, they will download up above in New Transactions,
and you can match them.
(or)
1. Select the account under "Spending Accounts".
2. Click "New" and enter the transactions.
3. Click "Save"
98. How do I split transactions?
There may be times in which you need to split a transaction. (In other words, show spending
from one transaction into multiple categories) For example, if you go to Wal-Mart and
purchase groceries and some clothing, you will not want the full purchase amount to be taken
out of your grocery envelope as that would be an inaccurate portrait of how you spent that
money. The application allows you to do this.
1. Select the transaction in New Transactions.
2. Click on "Split" at the top of the new transactions window and distribute the payment
among different envelopes.
To split a manual cash transaction, enter it under Pending Transactions and click on "Split"
(found at the bottom right end of the transaction). Select the envelope of your choice in the
split window and click OK. A Payment or Deposit box will pop-up. Select Payment, if you
are splitting a payment transaction and Deposit if it is deposit. Click 'OK'.
99. How can I edit transaction(s)?
You can easily edit a transaction. This can be done in the New Transactions register, the
Envelope register, or the Account register. Simply select the transaction with one click of
your left mouse button, and then make changes using one of the following methods:
•
•
Edit button – Once the Transaction is selected, simply click on the Edit button in the
menu just above the register. This will turn the whole transaction line into an editable
field. You can use the Tab key to move between the fields and make whatever
changes are necessary.
Double-Click – By double-clicking on any field of the transaction, you will be able to
make whatever edits you like and use the Tab key to move from field to field on that
same line.
When your changes are complete, simply click the Save button. You can follow these same
steps to make changes in any of the columns that are within the New Transactions or Pending
Transactions windows: Date, Payee, Payment/Deposit, or Account.
•
•
Edit button – Once the Transaction is selected, simply click on the Edit button in the
menu just above the register. This will turn the whole transaction line into an editable
field. You can use the Tab key to move between the fields and make whatever
changes are necessary.
Double-Click – By double-clicking on any field of the transaction, you will be able to
make whatever edits you like and use the Tab key to move from field to field on that
same line.
When your changes are complete, simply click the Save button. You can follow these same
steps to make changes in any of the columns that are within the New Transactions or Pending
Transactions windows: Date, Payee, Payment/Deposit, or Account.
100. How do I assign deposit transactions?
Verify that the deposit is not part of an account to account transfer or credit card payment. If
it is, assign it as an account to account transfer or a credit card payment. If it is not, then
depending on the type of deposit the transaction is, we would do one of the following:
If it is a deposit into a spending account (checking or cash): Select the deposit in New
Transactions and drag/assign it to Income Cash Pool.
If it is a deposit into savings that is not an account to account transfer, it should be put in the
Savings envelope. (If it is an account to account transfer, we would need to assign it as such
and then transfer the amount that we deposited in the savings account from the Income Cash
Pool or other envelope to the savings envelope). If there is not a savings envelope, create one.
(You can learn how to creat a new envelope by searching the knowledgebase with the key
words new envelope). The savings envelope balance should always reflect the savings
account balance.
If it is a deposit for a reimbursable expense, drag the deposit directly to the negative envelope
that is waiting for reimbursement. (You can also take it to the Income Cash Pool and fund it
from there, that just creates one additional step that isn't really necessary). If the amount to be
reimbursed was previously funded with the funds you had before the reimbursement deposit,
you may assign this reimbursement deposit to the Income Cash Pool and allocate it to your
regular expense envelopes.
And lastly, if it a refund deposit, such as when you make a return to a merchant, we would
want to assign the deposit to the envelope that the original purchase was assigned to, as we
still have that amount to spend in that particular category.
101. Can I match two pending transactions with 1 online
transaction?
You cannot technically match two pending transactions with one new transaction, however,
there are a couple of ways that you can manipulate the application to reflect that you have,
since there may be times in which you create multiple pending deposit transactions for one
lump sum deposit transaction. In such a case, depending on what you want to reflect with that
deposit, we would use one of the two options below:
If you would like to keep the deposit separated into different envelopes (the way you added
them as pending), you will need to :
1. Be sure that all of your separate pending transactions are equal to the lump sum deposit
made at the financial institution.
2. Clear the manual deposits you have made. (Highlight the transaction and click on "clear")
3. Delete the new lump sum transaction that is showing in the new transactions so that you
are not duplicating the lump sum of the deposit(s)
If you do NOT need the deposit separated, you can:
1. Highlight the downloaded transaction in the New Transactions register and then highlight
one of the pending transactions related to the online transaction.
2. Click on the “Match” option given at the top of the Pending Transactions section. A pop up
will prompt you that the amounts do not match and ask you if you'd like to continue. Click on
OK to continue.
3. This will change the pending transaction's amount to match with the online transaction
amount and it will be removed from both the New Transactions and thePending Transactions
section. The manual transaction will then appear with a "C"in the account register like any
other downloaded transaction, meaning it has cleared the financial institution.
4. Delete the remaining manual pending transaction(s) related to the original transaction by
highlighting the pending transaction that is no longer needed and clicking on the “Delete”
option given at the top of the Pending Transactions section.
102. How to add an online account?
1. Click on the Add option from Spending Accounts pane.
2. The Add Accounts window will appear.
3. Enter your financial institution and click on Search.
4. Select your financial institution from the list. Please make sure that you are not clicking on
the URL given besides the financial institution. If you click on the URL given against the
financial institution, you will be redirected to the bank's web site.
5. Next screen will ask you to enter the log in credentials.
6. Once the credentials are entered, click on 'Submit'.
7. Select the accounts you wish to submit and confirm it on next screen.
103. How do I store my login credentials in Mvelopes?
1. Click 'Manage' under 'Spending Accounts' window pane to access the 'Account Manager'
2. Click on the small pencil icon next to the financial institution listing.
3. Enter your login credentials into the proper fields.
4. Uncheck the checkbox next to "Do not store my login information."
5. Click Submit. Then click Submit on the following page.
6. Click Finish.
104. How to transfer from one account to another manually?
1. Select "Transfer" Spending Accounts windowpane.
2. This will bring up the Account Transfer Window.
3. Select the “From” account and the “To” account.
4. You may want to add a note.
5. Enter the required amount and click on 'OK.'
105. What happens at the end of my Mvelopes trial?
Once your trial period is over, you will be charged based on the subscription plan that
you selected during enrollment.
In order to cancel your free trial or to change your subscription plan you need to contact
us via live chat and request the desired change at least one day prior to your billing date. If
this is not done, the charge incurred is a non-refundable charge, regardless of whether or not
you choose to use the service. Your billing date and how much you will be charged is
communicated in your order confirmation e-mail.
The Mvelopes user agreement can be found at:
http://mvelopes.com/support/user-agree.php
106. How do I add an income?
You can add a new income to the application at any time. This can be accomplished by
following these steps:
1. Click on the "Spend Plan" icon at the top of the application
2. Click on "New", and select "Income".
3. Enter a name for that income and click "Save".
4. Choose if the income method is a fixed pay date or variable by month (you will almost
always select fixed unless its income from a business or something similar in which you can
pay yourself or be paid any day of the month)
5. Select a pay period from the drop down menu (weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, twice a month,
quarterly, annual, semi-annual etc.)
6. Select the first pay date of the current month using the small calendar.
7. Click on "Apply"
8. Click on "Save"
107. How to clear temporary files and cookies for Internet
Explorer?
1) Close the main application window.
2) Click on Tools and then Internet Options.
3a) If you are using Internet Explorer 7, click the Delete button from within Browsing
History. Click Delete Files. Click Delete Cookies.
3b) If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or earlier, click Delete Files. Check the box next to
Delete All Offline Content and click OK. Next, click Delete Cookies.
If you are using Internet Explorer 8:
1) Click on "Delete Browsing History..." from the Safety menu in the uppper right.
2) Check Temporary Interent Files, Cookies, and History, and then click Delete
108. How do I create a desktop icon for Mvelopes?
1. Copy the following URL into your clipboard (highlight the URL, right click then click
Copy): https://my.mvelopes.com/mvelopesweb/
2. Right-click on the Desktop and click on 'New' and select 'Shortcut' option.
3. This will bring up the Create Shortcut window.
4. Paste the link in the location box.
5. Click Next.
6. Enter a name for the shortcut.
7. Click Finish.
8. Right-click on the desktop and choose "Refresh" to refresh.
109. Can I delete a particular funding transaction?
You can delete any funding transaction by following these steps:
1. Select the funding transaction you want to delete. A funding transaction would have the
description "Envelope Funding: Manual". If the funding profile is given a specific name,
"Manual" is replaced with it.
2. Select Edit from the menu.
3. Select "-" beside the envelope for which you wish to remove the funding for.
5. Click "Ok".
This will change the total amount of the funding transaction. The difference will be put back
in to the Income Cash Pool.
Alternatively:
You can delete the entire funding transaction by selecting the funding transaction from
within the Income Cash Pool and clicking on "Delete". This will delete the entire funding
transaction, and the full amount allocated will return to the Income Cash Pool so that you can
re-allocate your money. This will work for a multiple envelope funding or an individual
envelope funding transaction.
110. Can I change the nickname of an online account?
You can change the account nickname at any time. You can accomplish this by following
these steps:
1. Click on "Manage" in the Spending accounts pane.
2. In the Account Manager window, click on the small Pencil icon next to the financial
institution's name that the account you want to rename is located at.
3. In the Account Setup page, update the nickname and click on "Submit".
4. Click on Submit again.
Note! The website nickname and the account nickname are not the same thing. You may
change the account nickname at any time, however, do not change the website nick name
unless directed to do so by product support as this will cause an error when we try to attempt
downloading transactions for your account, because the website nickname must match up
with how the account is displayed at the financial institution's website.
111. Why aren't my Excel reports displayed?
This could be due to a pop-up blocker being enabled for the browser. Turn off the pop up
blocker and try again. (If you hear a beep after clicking "Show Report", you know the
problem is related to a pop up blocker)
If this does not help, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the Excel report and click Show
Report.
112. How do I assign a finance or interest charge?
If a balance is carried on a credit account each month, finance charges will occur, and they
will be downloaded into the application as a new transaction. We need to have an envelope to
assign these fees to because they are a monthly expense, just like a car or cell phone payment.
We should create an envelope with the name "Finance Charges" or "Interest" or something
else similar to these examples so that we can assign these finance charges to an envelope and
have them accounted for. We would need to include this envelope in the Spending Plan, and
allocate the maximum expected amount of finance charges incurred each month. We would
also want to fund this envelope on a monthly basis, based on the amount we have outlined in
the Spend Plan.
Here's an example:
Let's say you carry a balance of $3,000.00 and are paying the minimum payments until this
card is paid off. Let's say that the minimum payment is $150.00 and they charge $50.00 for
interest, so $100.00 goes to the principal. We would want to fund the "money for" envelope
with the $100.00 and the "finance charges" envelope with the $50.00. This way, you can plan
the interest you are paying, and the amount that is going to the principal, and know exactly
where your money is going to go.
113. When are transactions downloaded?
The application automatically downloads transactions every day between 1 am and 5 am
MST. Only those transactions that are marked as "Cleared" and/or are not listed as pending
and have been posted to the file that we download at the financial institution's website will
come into the new transactions. For real-time updates, you can enter the transactions as
pending, or select "Refresh" in the spending accounts section in the lower left corner.
However, using the latter option, only transactions that have been cleared at the financial
institution's website and have been posted on the file that we download will appear in the new
transactions.
114. How do I handle loan repayments?
When we have a loan account added to the application we will also have a deposit (checking,
cash, or savings) account added to the application that we will be using to make payments at
regular intervals to pay off the total loan amount.
Since a loan is typically a monthly expense, we need to create an envelope for that loan, and
enter the monthly payment amount as the funding goal in the Spend Plan. We do this so that
the loan envelope is funded by that amount at the start of each month or the beginning of
the periodic cycle. This will insure that a certain amount has been set aside for paying off the
minimum monthly payments.
The payments made to the loan account through the deposit account will download into the
New Transactions register, and should be assigned to the previously funded loan envelope
(based on the Spend Plan) to bring the envelope balance to zero.
115. Why are some of my accounts not displayed in the Spending
Accounts Register?
Spending
Accounts
Net Worth Only
Accounts
Checking/Cash
Investments - (IRA,
401k)
Savings
Certificate of Deposits
(CD)
Money Market
Mortgage
Credit Cards
Loans (auto loans,
personal loans, etc)
Line of Credit
Offline Assets, such as
home value, etc.
The Spending Accounts windowpane only shows displays accounts from which you can
actively spend from. Accounts such as loans, investments, and mortgages are only seen in the
Net Worth summary. In order to include accounts of this nature in the spending plan would
need to create a new envelope for each of these accounts, and treat them like any other
expense.
116. What special characters are unsupported in the application?
The following characters are unsupported for the purposes of adding accounts in the
application:
:&<>;
117. How do I handle (assign) a purchase I made using my credit
card?
When you purchase something using your credit card, you want to assign it the same way you
would assign any other transaction - it would be assigned to the envelope that best represents
the purchase. For example, if you bought groceries with your credit card, you would
assign the transaction to the grocery envelope. If you paid your utility bill with your credit
card, you would assign the transaction to the utilities envelope. Assiging a purchase
transaction associated with a credit card is no different than assigning a purchase made
from a checking account.
118. How can I undo something I just did?
At the top of the application, there is an option that says "Undo". This will restore almost any
prior action in the application.
Actions that can be undone include:
i) Deleting transactions
ii) Splitting a transaction
iii) Account-to-account transfers
iv) Matching of pending transactions
v) Clearing of pending transactions
vi) Envelope to Envelope Transfer
vii) The Assignment of a Transaction (or multiple transactions if you assigned them all at
once and into the same envelope)
viii) An envelope funding
Remember, the undo is for one item - it will not undo everything if you continue to click on
it. It will undo the last thing you did, and that is all. In fact, it will gray itself out until
you perform another action that it can undo. If you adjust (edit) a transaction, you cannot use
the undo feature to put it back the way it was, you would need to edit that transaction again.
You also cannot undo the deletion of accounts or envelopes - these would need to be readded/re-created. If the "Undo" button is grayed out, you cannot undo that action using the
undo feature. If it is not grayed out, you are able to undo that action using the undo feature.
119. How do I edit an existing Funding Profile?
You have the ability to edit your funding profiles, and to create new ones. The most
commonly used method of accomplishing this is:
1. Select "Fund" icon at the top of the application.
2. Select "Fund using a saved profile" and select the funding profile you would like to change
from your list of saved profiles.
3. Make the desired changes and click on "Save Profile" in the top right corner of the funding
window.
4. Enter a name for this profile
5. Click on "Save"
6. Click on "Fund".
Note: This will create a new funding profile in addition to the existing one.
If you want to edit the existing funding profile without creating a new one:
In the Monthly Average View:
1. Click on the "Spend Plan" icon at the top of the application.
2. Change the amounts as desired in the Monthly Average Column by clicking on the amount
you wish to change and entering the amount you would like to change it to.
4. Click on 'Save'.
In the 12 month View:
1. Click on the "Spend Plan" icon
2. Click on "funding plan"
3. Find the funding plan that you would like to change.
4. Change the amounts as desired by clicking on the amount you wish to change and entering
the amount you would like to change it to.
5. Click on "Save"
120. How can I create a group of envelopes?
An envelope group is helpful when you have several expenses in one broad category. For
example, business expenses have several different categories but are all for business business bills, business purchases, business supplies, etc. You can create a "group" for any
given area in which you spend many different ways.
For a new envelope and a new group:
1. Select "New" in the Envelopes pane.
2. Enter the envelope name.
3. Under "Group Name" drop down box, select New.
4. Enter the group name and click on 'Save'.
5. Click Save.
For a new group alone:
1. Click on "New" in the envelopes pane
2. Select "New" from the "group" dropdown menu.
3. Enter the name of your new group.
4. Click on "Save".
5. Click on "Cancel"
You will be able to see the group in your envelope categories (you just won't have an
envelope in that group).
To assign an existing envelope to the new group you created, simply click on the envelope
you want in that group, click on "edit" at the top of the envelopes pane, and select your new
group as the group for this envelope.
121. How do I remove or edit an income?
As your income changes, you will need to make adjustments to your spending plan. To make
these changes, click on the Spend Plan icon
in the tool bar.
Edit Income – To edit one of your income sources, amounts, or pay period, simply select the
income that you need to change and then make the desired changes in the fields on the left.
Click "Apply" when you are finished.
Delete Income – To delete an income, click on the income once to highlight it and then click
"Delete" in the menu bar. Click "Yes" to confirm that you are deleting the income source.
After you have made your desired changes, click "Save" to save the changes you have made.
Clicking "Cancel" will undo any changes you made while the Spending Plan window was
open.
122. How can I see transactions in my envelopes from more or less
than 30 days ago?
To do this, you can click on the envelope that you which to see more or less dates in. Once
you open the envelope by clicking on it, in the upper right corner of the envelope is the word
"Period". If you click on this, it will give you the drop down menu options. You can select
All dates, Last 7 days, Last 30 days (default), Last 90 days, Last 12 months, Month to date,
Quarter to date, Year to date, Previous Month, Previous Quarter, or Previous Year. Select the
one that best fits what you need.
123. How do I transfer between an online account and an
offline/custom account?
When we transfer between an offline/custom account, only the online account deposit or
withdrawal of the transfer will appear in the New Transactions Register.
For example, if we transferred $100 from an online account to an offline account, only the
withdrawal from the online account will appear in the New Transactions. We would need to
drag this withdrawal to the online account listed in the Spending Accounts pane. The
"Account Transfer" window will appear. The online account will automatically default as the
"Transfer From" account, and the amount of the transfer will also be automatically populated.
Simply select the appropriate offline account as the "Transfer To" account from the drop
down menu. This will create a transaction in the offline account reflecting the deposit
("transfer") to the offline account, and will also show that withdrawal from the online
account.
Another pro-active approach to a transfer between an offline account and an online account
would be to enter it as an account transfer manually before the transaction from the online
account downloads. To do this, in the "New Transactions" at the bottom, there is a section
called "Pending Transactions". Click on "Account Transfer" underneath the words "Pending
Transactions". Select the account we are transferring from, and the account we are
transferring to, and enter the amount. This will create a pending transaction for us to match to
the transaction that is downloaded from the online account, and will clear the offline account
as soon as "Save" is clicked on.
Alternatively, we can delete the downloaded transaction from the online account and record
the account transfer manually. To do this, we can use the method mentioned above and click
on "transfer" in the pending transactions section, or we can select the account in the spending
accounts pane from which the money is coming from and hit "Transfer". In the Account
Transfer window, select the account we are transferring to in the "To" field, enter the amount
and hit OK.
124. Can I edit a funding transaction?
You can edit a funding transaction if desired. To do this:
1. Select the funding transaction.
2. Select Edit from the menu, or double click on the funding transaction you wish to edit
3. Double click on the envelope you wish to change the amount for. You can also add
additional envelopes by clicking on the "Next" tab.
4. Enter the dollar amount and click 'Ok'.
This will change the total amount of the funding transaction and the funded amount for that
envelope. The difference will be either deducted from or put back in to the Income Cash
Pool.
125. How do I create a pending Account to Account Transfer?
To create a pending account to account transfer, click on "Account Transfer" underneath
"Pending Transactions" within the New Transactions Window.
You will need to select the account you are transaferring from and the account you are
transferring to, and you will need to enter the amount of the transfer.
If you are transferring between two online accounts, then two pending transactions will be
created - one for each account, which you will match with the actual transactions when they
are downloaded into your new transactions register.
If you are transferring between an offline account and an online account, you will have one
pending transaction waiting to be matched with a new transaction for the online account
portion of the transfer, and the portion of the transfer that belongs to the offline account will
be cleared after you click on "ok".
126. What is integrated Bill Pay?
Great News! Integrated Bill Pay has been released! If you are already enrolled in Bill Pay,
there are some things you will need to know to make the transition as simple and easy as
possible.
You'll receive a notification after you log in to Mvelopes. If you have already established a
Bill Pay account, select the option "I am already enrolled in Bill Pay and would like to
integrate now". Then, you'll be asked for your Bill Pay username. From here, follow five
simple steps to integrate your information. To help us verify your identity, we’re going to
request the Routing Transit Number for one of the accounts you have added in Bill Pay (you
can find this number on your checks so to make it faster, have this ready beforehand).
Here's what you can expect from Integrated Bill Pay:
Single login - You only need to log into one place. That's right - one user name, one
password. (Pretty cool huh?! We thought so too!)
A 4-digit PIN – You get to choose a 4 digit PIN that you will need to use when you want to
schedule or cancel a payment. This is also to help protect your personal information. Treat
this PIN just like your debit card PIN.
No more double entry of scheduled payments - You can choose to display any payment in
the Pending Transactions Register when you create the Bill Pay payment for the bill. This
means that as soon as you schedule the payment, both the envelope and account balance
will update immediately. (That might even help you avoid any possible over draft fees,
since it will already show as deducted.)
With these changes, bill reminders and the automatic payment of e-bills are no longer
available. Unfortunately, these features are not included in the CheckFree Bill
Pay integration API.
We’re excited for these new changes, and we know it’s going to help make your life just a
little less complicated! (and who wouldn't like that?)
127. How can you migrate your existing bill pay account to
integrate it with the application?
If you have already enrolled for a bill pay account before the integrated Bill Pay was
released, you would need to Migrate your Bill Pay account to integrate it with the application.
To Migrate your Bill pay account, you would need to click on Already Enrolled link.
Here, it will ask you for your Bill Pay Username, then click Next.
Note: Username are case sensitive.
You will then need to complete 5 Steps:
Note: If you enter any of the information requested incorrectly, three times for any of the
steps, the Migration status will be Locked.
•
Step 1 of 5: Enter the Date of Birth (MM/DD/YYYY) and click Next.
Note: Must enter the DOB of the primary person on the Bill Pay account.
•
Step 2 of 5: Select the exact Account Number that you have in Bill Pay and click on
Next.
Note: There will always be 4 accounts listed, which 1 of the account is correct, the other 3
account number are random account number. If you select the incorrect account number, you
will get a prompt that says "Please Select a Valid Account Number", which then you will
need to click OK.
•
Step 3 of 5: Type the Routing Transit Number for the Account number you selected
on step 2 of 5 and click on Next.
Note: The Routing Transit Number can be found on the account's personal check book, it is
located at the bottom left corner.
•
Step 4 of 5: Enter a 4 digit PIN (Personal Identification Number), then Confirm the
4 digit PIN by enter it again, then click Next.
Note: 4-digit PIN cannot contain letters, only numbers, and cannot be in sequential order.
•
Step 5 of 5: Match your existing Bill Pay accounts to any Checking and Money
Market accounts you have already added within the application. This will allow you
to create pending transactions which can be assigned to envelopes of your choice. If
you have a Bill Pay account that you have not added to the application, please select
None, then click Done.
Last page you will see the following:
If you click on Take me to Bill Pay, you will see this:
Once you entered your PIN, you will be able to access Bill Pay.
128. I do not want the payment to be listed in the Pending
Transactions pane while scheduling a payment in Bill Pay. How do
I prevent Pending transactions for displaying when scheduling bill
payments or stop them from appearing for my automatic payments?
While scheduling a payment in Bill Pay:
1)Enter the amount in the Amount Field from the Payment Center screen.
2)Select the Pay Date.
3)Click Make Payments.
4)Uncheck the box “Show as Pending”. The Envelope drop down list will be grayed out.
5)Click Submit Payment.
If you do not want automatic payments to be listed in the Pending Transactions pane by
default:
1) Click on Manage my Bills
2) Select the desired biller name from the drop down menu
3) Select "Update automatic payment" option from the drop down menu against "What would
you like to do?"
4) Select "No" against "Show transaction in the pending transaction register option.
5) Click on Save Changes.
If you would like to remove a scheduled bill payment from Pending Transactions:
1) Single left click the desired transaction in the Pending Payments section in Bill Pay to
select it.
2) Click "Change"
3)Select "No" for the "Show Transactions in Pending Transactions Register"
4) Click "Save Changes" to finalize the change
129. Why do I have to confirm my account?
Confirming your account enables you to use all the features of Bill Pay. Unconfirmed
accounts have the following limitations:
•
•
•
Bill Pay sets a limit on the total amount of all bills you can pay from an unconfirmed
account.
Bill Pay also sets a limit (usually 45 days) on the total number of days you can make a
payment from an unconfirmed account.
You cannot set up automatic payments with an unconfirmed account.
•
•
You cannot transfer money to an unconfirmed account.
You cannot move payments to an unconfirmed account.
These limitations protect you in case someone attempts to use your account without your
authorization. When you confirm your account using information that only you or someone
you authorize to use your account can know, we re-evaluate your Bill Pay account and
remove most of the restrictions. The only limitation for a confirmed account is the payment
limit set by Bill Pay.
Account confirmation provides an extra level of assurance that the account you added
through Bill Pay is actually your account or an account that you are authorized to use.
Note: The information you need to confirm your account is available on an account statement
from your financial institution. Account confirmation transactions have ACCTCONFRM or
similar wording in the description.
You can have three unconfirmed accounts in a 12-month period, which includes any account
that you delete. If you reach this limit, you must confirm one of your accounts before adding
another.
130. How does account confirmation work?
Whenever you add an account to Bill Pay, we make two small deposits and one withdrawal in
your account. (The withdrawal is the sum of the two deposits.) The deposits and withdrawal
appear on your monthly statement from your financial institution (either online or mailed to
you) with ACCTCONFRM or similar wording in the description. Find this information on
your statement and use it to confirm your account.
Note: If you wait longer than the limit (usually 45 days) set by Bill Pay to confirm your
account, you won't be able to pay your bills from it until you confirm it. If you exceed the
number of attempts you have to confirm your account or there is a problem when we try to
send money to your financial institution to confirm your account, a message informs you to
print and mail us a form.
You can have three unconfirmed accounts in a 12-month period, which includes any account
that you delete. If you reach this limit, you must confirm one of your accounts before adding
another.
131. Why do I have limits for unconfirmed accounts?
Limits are for your protection in case someone attempts to use your account without your
authorization. When you confirm your account using information that only you or someone
you authorize to use your account can know, we re-evaluate your Bill Pay account and
remove most of the restrictions. The only limitation for a confirmed account is the payment
limit set by Bill Pay.
132. What should I do if I don't have any confirmation amounts on
my monthly statement?
Keep in mind that it can take up to a month for the account confirmation deposits and
withdrawal to appear on your monthly statement. The account confirmation deposits and
withdrawal are identified with ACCTCONFRM or similar wording in the description. The
description of the deposits may vary slightly, but should contain some indicator that the
deposits are for an account confirmation.
Some other ways that you can get this information are to check your account statement online
or to call your financial institution and ask for the confirmation deposit amounts.
If your financial institution has no record of the confirmation deposits and withdrawal, check
your account information on the Manage Account Options page. If the account information is
incorrect, you must add a new account with the correct account information.
133. How do I confirm an account?
1) Click My Accounts tab within the Bill Pay screen.
2) You should see “Unconfirmed” link next to the account number. Click that link to
confirm your account.
3) Next, enter both deposits that was sent to your account.
4) Click Confirm.
134. How do I see my bill history?
1)Click Bill History tab within the Bill Pay screen.
2)You can change the period from “Last 30 days and future” to “Last 180 days and future”.
3)You can change the Filter to narrow down the list.
135. How do I cancel my Pending Payments?
1)The Pending Payments column is displayed on the top right corner on the Payment Center
screen.
2)Select any payment that you wish to cancel.
3)Click Cancel tab from the tab within the same column.
136. Can I Change / Delete / Modify / Cancel the Recent Payments?
Unfortunately, once the payment that you had scheduled appears in the "Recent Payment"
section there is no way where you can stop or cancel it within Bill Pay. You can contact our
Live Chat support regarding this issue. They will be able to stop this payment depending on
the payment method and how soon you have contacted them.
137. I have forgotten my Bill Pay pin.
1)Click My Account from Mvelopes application.
2)Click Change Bill Pay PIN tab.
3)Click the link “Forgot your PIN”?
4)Enter the last 4 digits of your SSN number.
5)Enter your Zip Code.
6)Click Reset PIN.
A new pin will be sent to your registered email address.
138. How do I update my biller information?
1) Click Manage My Bills tab within Bill Pay.
2) Select the Biller Name from the drop down list next to “Biller Name”
3) In the “What would you like to do”? drop down list select “Update biller information”
4) Make the necessary changes.
5) Click Save Changes.
139. How
do I delete a biller?
1) Click Manage My Bills tab within Bill Pay.
2) Select the Biller Name from the drop down list next to “Biller Name”
3) In the “What would you like to do”? drop down list select “Delete this biller”
4) Click Yes on the confirmation box that will appear.
140. When I try to add an automatic payment the “Show
Transaction in the Pending Transactions Register” is grayed out.
This will happen if you have not selected the Pending Transaction Account while adding this
checking account from where you are currently trying to pay the bill. This issue can be fixed
by performing the below steps:
1)Click My Accounts within the Bill Pay screen.
2)Click Edit next to the account from where you are currently trying to pay the bill.
3)In the Pending Transaction Account drop down list select your Account name.
4)Click Save Changes.
141. Error 32014: Payment denied due to maximum payment
amount exceeded.
This error occurs when your account that you are trying to make your payment from is
unconfirmed. Unconfirmed account has certain limitations. In this case, you need to confirm
the checking or money market account to continue making payments.
How do I confirm an account?
1) Click My Accounts tab within the Bill Pay screen.
2) You then click on the “Unconfirmed” link next to your account number.
3) Enter both deposits.
4) Click Confirm.
142. Error 32023: Duplicate payment found on database payment.
This can happen when you are trying to schedule a payment that has already been scheduled.
Please logout of Mvelopes and login back then login to Bill Pay. You should now see the
transactions under the pending payment sections.
143. Why my scheduled payments do not appear under the Pending
Transactions pane?
This could be because you haven't selected the option "Show as pending" while scheduling
your payment. If your payment is pending, that payment will be located under the "Pending
Payments" window. There, you'll be able to edit your payment. To Edit your payment:
1) Under the "Pending Payments" window, select the payment you would like to edit by
clicking on it. This will cause that payment to be highlighted.
2) Click, "Change".
3) Select "Yes" next to "Show Transactions in Pending Transactions Register".
4) Select the envelope where you would like to assign this transaction to.
5) Click "Save Changes".
144. Nothing happens when I click continue button on Bill Pay
enrollment screen.
The cause behind this isse is that the data that you are entering is incorrect or missing. If there
is a problem with any specific field, it will appear in Red color as shown in this image
example:
Please review your enrollment form and check which field appear in red. Make the necessary
changes and/or enter the missing information, then click Continue.
Note: If you see the data that you have entered is correct, make sure it does not contain any
special character in it.
145. I made a payment, but the application did not give me
confirmation. Did it go through?
Several subscribers have seen an issue where when they make a payment it does not appear to
be made successfully. They then make another payment to the same vendor assuming the first
payment did not go through. Some users have noticed the duplicate payment in the pending
payments window, and deleted the second payment. Others, however, have not noticed and
have sent out two payments to the vendor.
There is a known issue with Checkfree (our bill-pay partner) where their system takes too
long to respond with a notice of successful payment when a payment is made at slow
processing times (around midnight-early am), even though the payment has actually been
made. In most cases, Checkfree responds with an Error 8011 "Duplicate transaction found in
the database", but if the payment amount, date, and payee is not exactly the same, a duplicate
payment error is not presented.
We are working on an enhancement to our system to handle this issue better, but until the
enhancement is in place, please take the following steps to see if a payment has been
scheduled before making a duplicate payment:
1. Log off, Log back in/launch the application
2. Launch Bill Pay
3. Check the Pending Transactions list for the payment in question. If the payment is not
in the pending transactions list after taking these steps, it has not been made.
Please contact support via live chat if you have a concern whether a payment you made was
successfully scheduled.
If you have already scheduled duplicate payments and they have cleared, you will need to
contact your payees/vendors directly to retrieve your funds.
146. How to balance sum of envelopes and deposit accounts?
Delete account reconciliation transaction needs to be adjusted to balance your envelope to
account ratio. This transaction is automatically created in Income Cash Pool after deleting an
account. Simply adjust it by the difference between the sum of the accounts and the sum of
the envelopes.
If you need further assitance balancing your account to envelope ratio, please chat with a
support agent by clicking on the live chat icon in the top right corner of this window.
NOTE: If you don't find any delete account reconciliation transactions, please contact
Support via Live Chat
147. What is Money for Life Coaching?
Money for Life Coaching is a principle based money management program for individuals who want
one on one mentoring to learn successful money management concepts and effectively apply
Mvelopes to achieve financial goals. The program is designed to help individuals put their finances
on autopilot by fully automating every aspect of money management. The Money for Life Coaching
program will help you apply Mvelopes to your lifestyle so you can:
-Rapidly eliminate consumer debt
-Create a personalized spending plan
-Spend within your income
-Establish emergency savings
-Reduce stress related to money
Click here to get started with Money for Life Coaching!
The Money for Life Coaching program is a service that you pay for while support is no cost to
subscribers. Support is Available 24 X 5 (Weekdays) to assist customers with product inquiries
when Mvelopes is not operating normally such as bank connectivity interruptions. Support also
covers basic service questions such as billing information changes, subscription plan changes, and
base use case questions. Support resources include:
-Unlimited customer support 24 X 5 (Weekdays) Live Chat or Ask a Questions
-Video Tutorials
-Extensive Knowledgebase
-Helpful forums
-Exclusive Finicity Mentors
To access the support options listed above, click on the "Support" icon in the toolbar when you are
logged into Mvelopes.
148. How do I add a bill in Bill Pay?
To pay your bills online, you simply add the companies and people you want to pay. You can
pay anyone in the United States that you would normally pay by check or automatic debit.
Even if you don't receive bills from the company or person you want to pay, you can still add
the information we use to make payments.
After you add the company or person to pay, the information appears in the Pay Bills section
of the Payment Center. The company or person remains in your list of bills until you delete
the biller. When you pay your bills, you simply find the bill you want to pay and enter the
amount and date for the payment.
Tip: If you have a recent bill or invoice from your biller, have it on hand when you add your
bill. Use it to find your account number, the biller's phone number, and other information you
may need.
Note: Remember to keep your bill information updated. If the name, address, phone number,
or account number changes, go to Manage My Bills and make the appropriate updates to
ensure that the bill information is accurate.
To go to Add a Bill:
•
Click Add a Bill on any page.
The Quick Add a Company or Person to Pay page opens.
Adding a Company With an Account Number
To add a company with an account number to your list of bills, you can enter:
•
•
The company's name, and we search our records to find the rest of the information we need
to make payments.
All the information we need to make payments: the company's name, address, phone
number, and your account number.
If you have an account number, please be sure to enter it. Your account number is the most
reliable means to ensure that the company can credit your payments properly.
When you add a company with an account number, you may be able to add an electronic bill,
which is also called an e-bill. An electronic bill typically contains the same information as the
printed bill that is mailed to you, but you receive your electronic bills through Bill Pay. Some
billers can also send you an electronic bill through e-mail.
To enter all of the company's information:
1. Click Company with an account number, and then click Continue.
2. Click enter all the information for your bill.
The Add a Company With an Account Number page opens.
3. In Biller Name, type the name of the company you want to pay.
4. In Account Number, type the account number exactly as it appears on your bill, and retype it
in Confirm Account Number.
5. In Biller Address 1, type the first line of the address where you send the payments for your
bill.
This may appear as the billing or remittance address on your statement.
6. To direct the payment to a specific person or department, type the information in Biller
Address 2.
Be sure to precede the information with either ATTN or C/O.
7. In Biller City/State, type the city name and select the state for the billing address.
8. In Biller ZIP Code, type the ZIP Code for the billing address.
9. In Biller Phone Number, type the phone number to contact regarding billing questions.
10. Click Add Bill.
The Company Added page opens. From this page, you can:
o
o
Return to the Quick Add a Company or Person to Pay page to add another bill.
Go to the Payment Center to pay your bill.
If the biller you added can send us electronic bills, you can:
o
o
Go to the Add an Electronic Bill page to request electronic billing service.
View a demo of electronic bills.
Adding a Company Without an Account Number
To add a company without an account number to your list of bills, you can enter:
•
•
The company's phone number, and we'll search publicly available phone listings and try to
find a name and address match for you.
All the information we need to make payments: the company's name, address, and phone
number.
If you don't have an account with the company you want to pay, you can still add the
information that we use to make payments. Your biller receives a payment with your name
and address information.
To enter all of the company's information:
1. Click Company without an account number, and then click Continue.
2. Click enter all the information for your bill.
The Add a Company Without an Account Number page opens.
3. In Biller Name, type the name of the company you want to pay.
4. In Biller Address 1, type the first line of the address where you send the payments for your
bill.
This may appear as the billing or remittance address on your statement.
5. To direct the payment to a specific person or department, type the information in Biller
Address 2.
Be sure to precede the information with either ATTN or C/O.
6. In Biller City/State, type the city name and select the state for the billing address.
7. In Biller ZIP Code, type the ZIP Code for the billing address.
8. In Biller Phone Number, type the phone number to contact regarding billing questions.
Note: If you typed the phone number on a previous page, it appears in this box.
9. Click Add Bill.
The Company Added page opens. From this page, you can:
10.
o Return to the Quick Add a Company or Person to Pay page to add another bill.
o Go to the Payment Center to pay your bill.
Adding an Individual to Pay
To add a person to your list of bills, you can enter:
•
•
The person's phone number, and we'll search publicly available phone listings and try to find
a name and address match for you.
All the information we need to make payments: the person's name, address, and phone
number.
To enter all of the person's information:
1. Click Person, and then click Continue.
2. Click enter all the information for your bill.
The Add a Person to Pay page opens.
3. In First and Last Name, type the name of the person you want to pay.
4. In Address 1, type the first line of the person's address.
5. To direct the payment to a specific person or department, type the information in Address
2.
Be sure to precede the information with either ATTN or C/O.
6. In City/State, type the city name and select the state for the billing address.
7. In ZIP Code, type the ZIP Code for the billing address.
8. In Phone Number, type the phone number for the person you want to pay.
Note: If you typed the phone number on a previous page, it appears in this box.
9. Click Add Bill.
The Person Added page opens. From this page, you can:
10.
o
o
Return to the Quick Add a Company or Person to Pay page to add another bill.
Go to the Payment Center to pay your bill
149. How do I add an electronic version of a bill? (e-bill)
You can receive some of your bills online in Bill Pay. You can view and pay these bills at the
Payment Center.
We have established relationships with hundreds of companies nationwide, and these
companies can send us an electronic bill. These electronic bills, which are also called e-bills,
typically contain the same information included in the paper bills that are mailed to you.
Your biller may offer the following features as part of your electronic billing service:
•
•
•
Receive your electronic bill through e-mail.
Pay your electronic bills automatically.
Allow you to have a different address, known as your service address, where you receive
your services.
Paper Bills
Some billers stop sending you paper bills when they start sending electronic bills. For these
billers, you must agree to receive only electronic bills to activate your service. Other billers
continue to send paper bills in addition to your electronic bills. Some billers let you choose
whether you want to receive just your electronic bills or both electronic and paper bills.
Adding an Electronic Bill
To activate your electronic billing service, you must provide information that the biller can
use to verify your account.
To add an electronic bill:
1. If an e-bill is available for this biller, click on the e-bill icon in bill pay. It is an 'e' with the
words 'sign up' in a green box with an arrow.
2. Type the information required by the biller in the pop up window.
Some billers may require information such as your Social Security number to verify your
identity. The biller may also require you to enter your account number again. Other billers
may require the information you set up to access your account online at the biller's Web
site, such as a user ID, account number, or password.
Tip: If you must re-enter your account number, be sure to enter it exactly as described on
this page. The biller may require additional information to activate electronic bills for your
account.
3. If your service address appears on this page, verify that it matches the address where the
biller provides your service. Click Change to make any changes to match your billing records.
4. If the biller lets you choose whether to receive both electronic and paper bills, or if the biller
offers a trial period, select your bill delivery options.
5. If the biller's Terms & Conditions appear on this page, review the information and select the
box to indicate that you've read and agree to them.
6. Click Submit.
We send your request to the biller. A confirmation message appears, which provides
additional information about your request. If you have other billers that can send electronic
bills, you can select one and repeat this procedure.
When you start receiving electronic bills, an electronic bill icon appears next to the biller
name in the Pay Bills section of the Payment Center. You can also find electronic bill
information in the Payment Assistant. You can click the electronic bill icon, or e-bill links in
the Payment Assistant, to view and pay your bill.
150. Bill Pay - Canceling or Changing Pending Payments
The Pending Payments section presents a quick summary of the payments you've made that
have not been processed yet.
A payment with the status Processing has started processing. You cannot change or cancel it.
It moves to the Recent Payments section when processing is complete.
Viewing Your Pending Payments
This section lists the bills, the amount of the payment, and the pay date. It also provides a
total amount for all the pending payments.
Tip: If you're having trouble recognizing a bill, you can move your mouse over a biller to see
the biller's full name.
To go to the Pending Payments section:
1. Click Payment Center on any page.
The Payment Center opens.
2. Go to the Pending Payments section.
Note: The Payment Assistant may cover the Pending Payments section. The Payment
Assistant appears when you click the:
o Amount or Date boxes.
o Biller name link.
o Calendar icon.
Click anywhere outside these areas to close the Payment Assistant.
To view your pending payments:
•
In the Pending Payments section, view your pending payments.
Changing a Payment
You can change any payment paid from a confirmed account that has not started processing.
If the payment was made from an unconfirmed account, you can only cancel it.
Note: If you change a payment that is part of an automatic payment schedule, only the
selected payment is changed. You do not change any future payments in the payment
schedule. To change all payments in an automatic payment schedule, go to Manage My Bills
and change the automatic payment.
To change a payment:
1. Click Change next to the payment you want to change.
The Change Payment page opens.
2. Enter the changes you want to make.
3. Click Save Changes.
A message informs you that your changes have been made.
4. Click Finished to return to the Payment Center.
Canceling a Payment
You can cancel any payment that has not started processing. After you cancel a payment, its
status changes to Canceled and it is not processed. Canceled payments appear in:
•
•
The Recent Payments section of the Payment Center.
Payment Activity.
Note: If you cancel a payment that is part of an automatic payment schedule, only the
selected payment is canceled. You do not cancel any future payments in the payment
schedule. To cancel all payments in an automatic payment schedule, go to Manage My Bills
and delete the automatic payment.
To cancel a payment:
1. Click Cancel next to the payment you want to cancel.
The Cancel Payment page opens.
2. Click Cancel Payment.
A message informs you that your payment has been canceled.
3. Click Finished to return to the Payment Center.
151. How do I add my account in bill pay?
To add an account, you need your account number and your financial institution's routing
transit number. You can find these numbers on a check or deposit slip for your account.
To add an account:
1. In the What would you like to do? section, click Add an account.
The account information appears below the add option.
2. In Account Type, select the type of account from which the funds are withdrawn. The
account type can be a regular checking account or a money market account with checkwriting privileges.
3. Click either Personal Account or Business Account, depending on the type of account you
want to add.
4. In Account Name, type something that identifies the account to you. Typing a description for
the account name helps remind you which account you are using—for example, My
Checking or My Business Expenses.
5. In Routing Transit Number, type your financial institution's routing transit number.
Tip: You can usually find this number in the bottom left corner of your check, or you can call
your financial institution and ask for the number. This number must be correct for your
payments to process.
6. In Confirm Routing Transit Number, retype the routing transit number to verify it.
7. In Account Number, type your account number.
Tip: You can usually find this number at the bottom of a check or on your account
statement. This number must be correct for your payments to process.
8. In Confirm Account Number, retype your account number to verify it.
9. Click Add Account.
A message confirms that your new account has been successfully added.
10. Click Finished.
The new account appears in your accounts list.
Note: If this is your first time adding an account, you go to a page where you can start using
Bill Pay.
You should confirm your new account as soon as possible. Confirming your account enables
you to use all the features of Bill Pay. You can have three unconfirmed accounts in a 12month period, which includes any account that you delete. If you reach this limit, you must
confirm one of your accounts before adding another.
152. How do I confirm a checking account?
Confirming your account enables you to use all the features of Bill Pay. Unconfirmed
accounts have the following limitations:
•
•
•
•
•
Bill Pay sets a limit on the total amount of all bills you can pay from an unconfirmed account.
Bill Pay also sets a limit (usually 45 days) on the total number of days you can make a
payment from an unconfirmed account.
You cannot set up automatic payments with an unconfirmed account.
You cannot transfer money to an unconfirmed account.
You cannot move payments to an unconfirmed account.
These limitations protect you in case someone uses your account without your authorization.
When you confirm your account using information that only you or someone you authorize to
use your account can know, we re-evaluate your Bill Pay account and remove most of the
restrictions. The only limitation for a confirmed account is the payment limit set by Bill Pay.
Whenever you add an account to Bill Pay, we make two small deposits and one withdrawal in
the account. (The withdrawal is the sum of the two deposits.) The deposits and withdrawal
appear on your monthly account statement from your financial institution (either online or
mailed to you) with ACCTCONFRM or similar wording in the description. Find this
information on your statement and use it to confirm your account.
To confirm an account:
1. In the Status column, click Unconfirmed next to the account you want to confirm.
The Confirm Account page opens.
2. Check the account statement from your financial institution and find two deposits with
ACCTCONFRM or similar wording in the description.
3. In Confirm Deposit Amount 1, type one of the deposit amounts from your statement.
4. In Confirm Deposit Amount 2, type the other deposit amount from your statement.
5. Click Confirm to confirm your account.
The Manage Account Options page opens again, and the status of your account changes to
Confirmed.
153. How do I delete a Bill Pay account?
If you close an account or no longer want to use an account to make your payments from Bill
Pay, you can remove it from your accounts list. Deleting an account cancels all pending
payments paid from this account, including automatic payments and repeating transfers. If
you've made any payments from the account you want to delete, you may want to move them
to another account.
Before you delete an account, consider whether it is the one from which your service fees are
withdrawn. If it is, you must select a different account from which to withdraw your fees. Go
to My Accounts and select the option to change your Billing Account.
Note: You cannot delete the last remaining account in your accounts list. (Service Fee/Billing
account for Bill Pay)
To delete an account:
1. Click Delete Account next to the account you want to delete.
A confirmation message appears.
2. Click OK to delete the account.
The account is removed from your accounts list.
Note: Deleting an account will not stop any payments that are in a pending state.
154. How do I manage my account transfers?
Transferring Money
You can transfer money two ways in Bill Pay:
•
•
Single Transfer— A one-time transfer that takes place on the earliest available date or up to
one year in the future.
Repeating Transfer— A transfer that repeats automatically on a recurring schedule.
Transfers are typically credited to your account one to three business days after the transfer
date, depending on the amount of the transfer and your transfer limits. Your transfer limits
are determined based on information that we received from the consumer credit reporting
agency that verified your information when you enrolled.
Before you can make a transfer, you must have two accounts set up in Bill Pay and the
account you are transferring money into must be confirmed.
To make a single transfer:
1. In the What would you like to do? section, click Transfer money.
The transfer information appears below the transfer option.
2. Leave the No option selected.
3. In From Account, select the account you want the money withdrawn from.
4. In Transfer Amount, type the amount you want to transfer.
5. In To Account, select the account you want the money deposited into.
Note: You can only transfer money to a confirmed account.
6. In Transfer Date, type the date you want this transfer to occur.
Tip: Click the calendar icon to help you select a date to make the transfer.
7. Click Transfer.
A confirmation message appears.
8. Click Finished.
The transfer information appears in the Recent Transfers list if it falls within the next 30
days.
To set up a repeating transfer:
1. In the What would you like to do? section, click Transfer money.
The transfer information appears below the transfer option.
2. Click the Yes option.
3. In From Account, select the account you want the money withdrawn from.
4. In Transfer Amount, type the amount you want to transfer.
5. In To Account, select the account you want the money deposited into.
Note: You can only transfer money to a confirmed account.
6. In First Transfer Date, type the date that you want the first transfer to occur.
Tip: Click the calendar icon to help you select a date to make the first transfer.
7. In Transfer Frequency, select how often you want to make the transfer.
8. In Send Transfers Until, select one of the following options for the length of time you want
the transfers to repeat:
• Click I change or cancel this transfer to schedule the transfer indefinitely until you
change or cancel it.
• Click A total of x transfers are sent to automatically schedule a specified number of
transfers. Type the number of transfers in the box.
• Click But not after to automatically schedule the transfers until the specified date.
Type the date in the box.
Tip: Click the calendar icon to help determine the cutoff date for making the final
transfer.
Note: If you choose Twice a Month for the frequency, the cutoff date may be
adjusted to allow transfers to be made within that frequency.
Click Transfer.
A confirmation message appears.
Click Finished.
The transfer information appears in the Recent Transfers list if it falls within the next 30 days.
Updating a Repeating Transfer
You can update any repeating transfer that you set up.
To update a repeating transfer:
1. In the What would you like to do? section, click Update repeating transfer for the repeating
transfer you want to change.
The repeating transfer information appears below the update option.
2. Enter the changes you want to make.
3. Click Save Changes.
A message appears listing the transfers affected by your changes.
4. Click OK.
The message window closes.
5. Click Finished.
Your changes are saved, and the updated transfer appears in the Recent Transfers list if it is
scheduled within the next 30 days.
Canceling a Repeating Transfer
You can cancel any repeating transfer that you've set up. When you cancel a repeating
transfer, you cancel any pending transfers in the schedule.
To cancel a repeating transfer:
1. In the What would you like to do? section, click Cancel repeating transfer for the repeating
transfer you want to cancel.
A confirmation message appears.
2. If you're sure that you want to cancel this repeating transfer, click OK.
The repeating transfer is canceled.
155. What are the principles behind Mvelopes?
Mvelopes is based on the "traditional envelope method of budgeting" which refers to the
method of using actual paper envelopes to divide spending money into categories to plan
ahead for upcoming expenses and better keep track of how the money is being spent.
When cash was more regularly used for all purchases, people would cash their checks, and
then divide the cash into various paper envelopes, with a separate envelope for each spending
category. When purchases were made, the cash was drawn from the corresponding envelope.
Once the cash was gone from one envelope, it was clear to see that they needed to make a
choice: either cut spending in another area by removing cash from that envelope, or forego
making a purchase until there was enough accrued in the envelope for that purchase. It was
virtually impossible to overspend.
While using cash may not always be realistic in our electronic society, these principles can
still be effectively applied, and are the foundation of the Mvelopes application.
156. Navigating within the application
Navigating within the application overview:
Navigating within the application is easy because it looks and feels like many applications
that you already use. The application is generally divided into two sections or windowpanes,
with the menu bar and tool bar at the top of the screen.
Clicking on an envelope or account in the left windowpane will open the envelope or account
register in the right windowpane, allowing you to view transactions within the envelope or
account.
Menu Bar
The menu bar consists of the following options: File, Undo, Tools, My Account, Help, and
Logout.
Tool Bar
The tool bar consists of the following options: Spend Plan, Bill Pay, Net Worth, Reports,
Calculator, Mobile, Tutorials, and Support.
Windowpanes:
Left Windowpane
The left windowpane is used for navigation through the application. The left
windowpane contains a file tree which shows a list of your envelopes and accounts.
You can click on an icon in the file tree to display the transactions for that envelope or
account in the right windowpane. The left windowpane has two parts: The Envelopes
section and the Spending Accounts section. When the envelopes are closed, there will
be an envelope at the bottom of the Envelopes section that will display the totals for
all your envelopes, including the Income Cash Pool and Money For sections.
When your Envelopes are opened, the total amount in each envelope will be displayed
to the right. Closing an envelope group will display the total for all the envelopes in
that group.
Right Windowpane
The right windowpane shows the transactions for the envelope or account that you
have selected in the left windowpane.
157. What and where is the 'Home' View?
We highly recommend going through the setup wizard when you log in for the first time to
help you get started.
Home is the default page that appears when you log in after you have completed or skipped
the setup wizard. The left windowpane shows the file system that displays the different
sections, folders, and envelope accounts that you have. On the far right side of the Home
page is the task and system message bar, or Message Center, with helpful links and new
feature announcements.
158. What and where is the menu bar?
The menu bar can be found at the top left of the screen. The menu bar functions just as a
menu bar in most software applications or internet browsers. Click on an item in the menu
bar to see a dropdown menu of options, and then click on an option to launch the
corresponding page.
The Menu options consit of 'File', 'Undo', 'Tools', 'My Account', 'Help' and 'Logout'
159. What and where is the Tool Bar?
The tool bar consists of the following icons: Spend Plan, Bill Pay, Net Worth, Reports,
Mobile, Tutorials, and Support.
The Spend Plan icon will launch the spending Plan window where you will enter the
amounts of your various incomes, create your spending plan, and enter your funding plan.
The Bill Pay icon allows you to log in to Bill Pay where you can sign up to receive and pay
your bills online, schedule recurring or automatic transfers, and view all pending and past
payments.
The Fund icon opens your fundign window where you will 'fund' money into your
envelopes. (This is also called allocating to your envelopes or putting money in y our
envelopes).
The Reports icon opens a new window, allowing you to run several reports on your
envelopes, your accounts and transactions.
The Mobile icon opens up a window where you can select your mobile preferences. You can
select which envelopes you want to appear when accessing your account on your mobile
phone in order to eliminate having to search through a large number of pages. You can also
enter a list of common payees for manual transactions. You will then be able to select from
this list when entering a manual transaction from your mobile phone in order to minimize the
amount of manual data entry.
The Tutorials icon opens up the window where you will use and review the online
tutorials to help you use the application more effectively right from the start. They will help
you to have a better understanding of the application and how it is designed to be used.
The Support icon opens the Support page where you can view options for contacting a
customer service representative.
160. What are the window Panes in the application?
The application is visually divided into two basic sections, or windowpanes. The one on the
left lets you navigate and display the associated screen on the right. On the Home page, there
is also a message window at the far right, where you will find access to FAQs,
announcements, etc.
Right Windowpane – The right windowpane shows the transactions for the envelope or
account that you have selected in the left windowpane.
Left Windowpane – The left windowpane is used for navigation through the application.
The left windowpane contains a file tree which shows a list of your envelopes and accounts.
You can click on an icon in the file tree to display the transactions for that envelope or
account in the right windowpane. The left windowpane has two parts: The Envelopes section
and the Spending Accounts section.
Envelopes Section of the LeftWindowpane – Within the Envelopes section of the left
windowpane you can navigate to Home, New Transactions, Income Cash Pool, or individual
envelopes. When you click on an icon in the left windowpane, the pages will display in the
right windowpane.
New Transactions – When you select the New Transactions folder on the left, the New
Transactions register will open on the right, displaying all your new or unassigned
transactions from any spending accounts you have linked to the applciation. From this
window, you can assign these transactions to their appropriate envelopes or to the Income
Cash Pool. You can also create new manual transactions from the New Transactions register,
and match pending transactions when they clear.
Income Cash Pool – The Income Cash Pool functions as a holding envelope, where you can
store your paycheck or other income until you are ready to divide it among your individual
envelopes. Even if you plan to put the money into your envelopes (this is also called funding
your envelopes) immediately, the Income Cash Pool will allow you to select a funding profile
to automatically divide the money among your envelopes. Funding profiles are based on your
spending plan, or can be manually created and then saved.
Money For – The Money For section is designed to help you make credit card payments.
When you assign a credit card purchase to a spending envelope, the exact transaction amount
is then reallocated from your spending envelopes to the Money For envelope, which is set
aside for repaying that credit card. When the bill comes due, the money is sitting in the
Money For envelope, ready to pay the bill in full.
Envelopes – Below the New Transactions folder and the Income Cash Pool are all of your
envelopes (also called envelope spending accounts). Each envelope has a register that will
show all the transactions assigned to this envelope. This register will be displayed in the right
windowpane when you click on the envelope name on the left.
Spending Accounts Section of the Left Windowpane – In the left windowpane, below
your envelopes, is the Spending Accounts section displaying each of your spending accounts.
Here, you can add, manage, refresh, or transfer between accounts. You can also click on an
account to open its account register in the right windowpane and view its assigned
transactions.
161. How do I access the Spend Plan?
You can access the Spend Plan by clicking on the 'Spend Plan' icon at the top of the
application.
This brings up a popup window, which asks if you would like to use the Income/Envelope
view or the Envelope Only view. If you have a highly variable income, and cannot
reasonably estimate your income in any given month, you may want to select the Envelope
Only view. This view will allow you to calculate your cash requirements for an average
month. You will then be better able to understand how to manage your money in months
where your income is either over or under these requirements.
Most people, however, are able to reasonably calculate their income each month. Selecting
the Income/Envelope view will allow you to plan your spending based on your income
amounts.
After selecting which view you want to use, you can begin setting up your spending plan by
entering in any income sources and then creating the actual spending plan, which is dividing
up your income amounts based on what you plan on doing with the money. If you choose the
Envelope Only view, you won't enter in any income amounts, but will be able to enter in the
amounts you expect to spend each month.
162. How do I add an income to the application?
Once you've opened the spend plan window, you can enter your income by clicking "New" in
the menu bar, and selecting "Income" from the dropdown menu.
Income Name – A popup window will appear asking you to name the income. This is how
the income will appear in Mvelopes. After you enter a name, click "Save" and follow the
instructions that appear at the left of the Spending Plan window.
163. What are the 12 month view and the monthly average view?
Monthly Average View and 12-Month View
You have the option of viewing your spending plan in either a Monthly Average View or a
12-Month View.
Monthly Average View – This view will show your monthly average and your annual
amounts for both income and expenses.
If you are paid weekly or every other week, your average monthly income will be different
from your actual income in any given month. This is because most months are made up of
several full weeks plus a few extra days, so the number of times that your payday appears in a
month will vary from month to month. If you are paid weekly, you will receive four
paychecks during eight months of the year, and five paychecks during the other four months.
If you are paid every other week, you will receive two paychecks during 10 months of the
year, and three paychecks during the other two months.
The Monthly Average View simply averages all 12 months together. Because the amount is
an average, there will be months when your spending plan is less than your actual income,
and months when it is more than your actual income.
12-Month View – This view will show your income and envelope totals for each of the next
12 months. You can edit the amounts for any envelope by clicking on the amount for the
desired month. If you wish to change the envelope amount and apply it to each month, you
can click on the envelope name and then select "Monthly" as the period from the dropdown
menu. Click "Apply," and the amount will be adjusted for every month. If you enter any
period other than "Monthly" and select "Apply," The money manager will take the amount
and divide it by 12 to give you a monthly amount. This helps you to know how much money
you need to set aside each month to cover purchases from periodic spending envelopes like
Holiday Gifts, Vacations, Auto Maintenance, and Birthdays.
Whichever view you are in when you save your spending plan will become the default view
the next time you open your spending plan.
Select Method – Your income will be calculated based on one of two options: "Fixed Pay
Date," or "Average Amount." The Fixed Pay Date option allows you to enter your pay period
(e.g. weekly, every other week, twice a month, etc.), your income amount per pay period, and
the actual days you receive your income. Your annual and average monthly income based
will then be calculated based on this information.
If you are paid weekly or every other week, your average monthly income will be different
from your actual income in any given month. This is because most months are made up of
several full weeks plus a few extra days, so the number of times that your payday appears in a
month will vary from month to month.
If you are paid weekly, you will receive four paychecks during eight months of the year, and
five paychecks during the other four months. If you are paid every other week, you will
receive two paychecks during 10 months of the year, and three paychecks during the other
two months. The Monthly Average View simply averages all 12 months. You can use the 12
Month View to see the actual amounts you will receive each month, including months with
an "extra" paycheck.
164. How do I fund my envelopes?
Once you have added your financial accounts and created a spending plan, you are ready to
fund, or put money into your envelopes. After you put the money into your envelopes, your
setup will be complete.
Starting Balance Transactions – When you add your financial accounts, the current balance
will be retrieved from each of the spending accounts you added. This current balance is
termed your "Starting Balance," and a transaction representing this amount will appear in
your Income Cash Pool.
To divide this amount among your envelopes, click the Fund button.
This will bring up a funding window with two options:
•
The first option allows you to manually decide how to allocate your money,
determining the amount to put in each envelope. You can manually enter in an
amount for each envelope or the percentage of the total amount available to fund. You
should include amounts you plan to spend and amounts you plan to save. At the
bottom of the screen, you can see the total amount in the Income Cash Pool, the total
amount you have entered to divide among your envelopes, and the difference between
the two. The difference automatically updates as you enter in your envelope amounts.
•
The second option allows you to select a funding profile that you previously created.
Profiles are created either manually, as was described in option one, or automatically
by the system based on your monthly Spending Plan.
The option you choose will depend on whether or not you can fund your envelopes one
month in advance, or if you are currently spending paycheck-to-paycheck, and when it is in
the month or pay cycle. If you can fund your envelopes one month in advance, and it is the
beginning of the month, you can select the second option and select the profile for that
month. Find out how to put money in your envelopes if you spend paycheck to paycheck or if
it is anytime in the middle of the month.
When finished, click "Fund" or "OK."
165. How do I fund if I spend paycheck to paycheck?
Funding if you spend paycheck-to-paycheck
If you spend paycheck-to-paycheck, and cannot yet fund your envelopes one month in
advance, then the first time you put money into your envelopes, you will want to put in only
the amount you will need to spend before your next paycheck. By minimizing your spending
each paycheck and setting aside the rest, you will soon have enough set aside to fund your
envelopes one month in advance.
In order to put the money into your envelopes for the first time, simply click on one of the
starting balance transactions, and while holding down the left mouse button, drag it to the
Income Cash Pool, which is located under the Envelopes heading. Once the Income Cash
Pool is highlighted, release the mouse button.
This will bring up a funding window. Select the second option, and then enter in the amounts
for each envelope that you plan on spending before your next paycheck. When you are
finished, click "Fund" and the money will be divided among the envelopes based on the
amounts you entered. You are then ready to begin spending from these accounts.
You may also wish to use a funding plan to help you meet your monthly funding goals on a
paycheck-by-paycheck basis.
166. What is the funding plan?
When you create a funding plan, you save a funding profile for each of your expected pay
dates. You can also click the Save Profile button when manually funding your envelopes to
create and name a custom profile.
You can then select this new profile later to use it again
Once you select a saved profile, you can still edit it before funding. Once you click "Fund,"
the money is then allocated to each envelope based on the amounts in the funding profile.
167. How do I execute a funding profile?
Executing a funding profile
To execute your monthly funding profile, click on the Income Cash Pool envelope in the left
windowpane. Select "Fund" from either menu in the top of the left or right windowpane.
This will launch the Funding Options popup, where you can either manually fund one or
more envelopes or fund using a saved profile.
If you select "Manually fund using one or more envelopes," you will need to enter the
amount(s) to fund for each envelope. You can:
1.
1. enter the exact amount you want to put in the envelope;
2. enter a percentage of the Income Cash Pool to add to the envelope; or
3. check the Remainder box, which will fund the envelope with the amount you
need to reach your funding goal for that month.
When you have finished, click "Fund" to save your changes.
If you select "Fund using a saved profile," you can choose your profile from the
dropdown menu. You will also have the option to edit or delete a saved profile.
After you have selected a profile, the application will automatically fill in the envelope
amounts from your profile.
If you change your mind after selecting either option to fund your envelopes, click "Cancel,"
and your changes will not be saved.
168. What report options do I have?
Creating reports: overview
Open the report creation window by clicking on the Report icon
in the tool bar. Once
the Reports window pops up, select the type of report you want to generate: Envelope
Reports, Account Reports or Spending Plan Reports. All the available reports of that type will
appear in the right side of the window. Highlight the desired report by clicking on it once.
Depending on the report you choose, you can determine the time period and type of
envelopes or accounts to include in the report.
You can also choose to generate the report in an Internet browser, a PDF file, or a
spreadsheet.
When you are ready, click "Show Report" to generate and view your report.
You can create the following reports:
Envelope Reports
•
•
•
•
Current Envelope Balance Report – Current balance by envelope.
Cash Flow Report – Cash in and cash out by envelope
Spending by Month Report – Summary of monthly spending by envelope
Transactions Report – Transactions by envelope
•
Monthly Funding and Spending Report – Compare spending plan, actual funding, and
spending by envelope
Account Reports
•
•
•
•
Transaction by Payee Report – Find transactions by specific payee
Account Register Report – Transactions and balances by account
Deposit Account to Envelope Comparison Report – Sum comparison of all deposit
account balances and all envelope balances
Net Worth Statement – Sum of total assets and liabilities added to the application
Spending Plan Reports
•
•
Spending Plan Report – Show detail of current Spending Plan
Funding Plan Report – Show all funding profiles
Quicken Reports
You can also run Account Register reports and Transaction by Payee reports using
information that you import from Quicken.
169. What and where is the Debt Calculator?
The Debt Calculator is a great tool to help you with your debt reduction plan. It helps you
map out the quickest path to becoming debt-free.
Launch the calculator by clicking "Tools" in the menu bar and selecting "Debt Calculator"
from the dropdown menu.
This will launch the popup Debt Calculator window, where you will see tabs for My
Debts and the Loan Calculator.
170. How do I create a Spend Plan?
After you have entered in your incomes, you are ready to create your actual spending plan.
Your spending plan shows what you are planning on doing with your income each month. It
should include both spending and saving.
You can create your spending plan in either a Monthly Average View or a 12-Month View
Create the Spending Plan in the Monthly Average View
There are two ways to enter an amount for an envelope in the Monthly Average View:
•
Click on the envelope name, and then enter the amount in the field on the left. For the
period, you can select monthly, quarterly (every 3 months), semi-annually (every 6
months), or annually. Your monthly and annual totals will then be calculated.
•
Click on the monthly average for an envelope. When the cursor appears, enter the
amount. This will automatically be the monthly amount, and the annual total will be
calculated. You can press the enter key to go to the next envelope, or use the up and
down arrow keys to move within the column.
The total of all the envelope amounts you enter will calculated. The difference between your
envelope totals and your income will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Create the Spending Plan in the 12-Month View
The 12-Month View will allow you to create a different spending plan for each month, based
on your actual income or spending amounts for each month, instead of the average amount.
When you are finished entering the amounts for the envelopes, click "Save." Whichever view
you are in when you save your spending plan will become the default view the next time you
open your spending plan.
171. How can I customize my envelopes?
To maximize the effectiveness of the application, you'll want to customize your list of
envelopes to your particular situation. Most people find that it’s best to begin with no more
than 20 envelopes as they start to monitor their spending. As you get a better sense of where
you spend your money, you can increase the number of envelopes to be more specific in
certain areas if desired.
To customize your envelopes, you can add, edit, or delete any number of envelopes.
•
To add another envelope, click "New" in the menu bar above the Envelope section in
the left windowpane.
When the popup window appears, simply type in the name of the new envelope, and
select a group if appropriate. Click "Save" when you’re finished, and the envelope
will be added.
•
To change the name of an envelope, click on the envelope name to highlight it, and
then click the Edit button in the menu above. This will open the Create/Edit Envelope
window. Once you have completed your change, click the Save button and the
window will close. This popup window is also where you can change the envelope
type and group assignment.
•
To delete an envelope, highlight the envelope by clicking on it once, and then click
the Delete button in the menu bar above.
172. How do I create a funding plan?
The funding plan is designed to help you see how you will meet your monthly funding goals
on a paycheck-by-paycheck basis.
To access the Funding Plan window, click the Spend Plan icon in the tool bar.
The Monthly View of your Spending Plan is the same as your Funding Plan, so you will need
to be in the 12 Month View to take advantage of the functionality of the Funding Plan. If you
are in the Monthly Average View, switch to the 12 Month View by moving your mouse to the View
menu and selecting "12 Month View" from the dropdown menu.
Once you are in the 12 Month View, select the month for which you would like to create a
funding plan, and click the Funding Plan button. The Funding Plan window will appear.
Your monthly funding amount will be listed in the first column, and each of your paydates
for that month will be displayed in a separate column. (This is based on the income
information you entered in your Spending Plan.)
Click on any cell to edit it so you can allocate exactly how each paycheck will be spent.
When you're finished, click "Save." You'll be asked whether you want to save the plan for
this and all future months, or for this month only.
If you have regular paychecks and pay periods, you may find it helpful to save the plan for
"this and all future months."
After you have saved your plan for all future months, you can still edit some months
individually. For example, if you get paid weekly or every two weeks, you will have an
"extra" paycheck in some months. Your income for some months may also be different if you
receive an annual bonus or a holiday gift, or if you receive some periodic income.
You can open the profile for any unusual months, edit it, and save it for "this month only."
173. How can I group multiple incomes?
Sometimes you may want to group multiple incomes. For example, you may want to group
your incomes by source (such as all of his paychecks and all of her paychecks) or timeframes
(such as all income received during the first half of the month and all income received during
the second half of the month).
To group multiple incomes, check the box for each income and then click the Group button.
The selected columns will be combined and their totals will be added together.
If you change your mind, you can click the Ungroup button to separate your combined
incomes. As long as you haven't changed any of the funding amounts for the combined
incomes, your funding plan for each income will return to the way it looked before you
grouped them. If you did change any of your funding amounts, the new amount that you
entered will be associated only with the first income after you ungroup them.
174. Does the application actually move my money?
Once you have added your financial accounts and created a spending plan, you are ready to
put money into your envelopes.
It is important to understand that the application doesn't actually move any money from any
of your accounts. The envelopes are simply a visual representation of what you are planning
on doing with the money in your accounts. By seeing your money divided among these
envelopes instead of sitting in a lump sum in your accounts, you can see exactly how much
money you have to spend on certain categories, and how each purchase affects your overall
plan. It allows you to make informed spending decisions. Then as you make purchases, you
assign the purchases to the envelopes instead of just your account. In this way, each envelope
functions as a sort of spending account for specific types of purchases. This is one of the key
features of our online money manager.
In order to begin spending from your envelopes, you need to visually divide the money in
your accounts among the envelopes, or in other words, you need to put the money into your
envelopes. You can begin by clicking on the New Transactions link under the Envelopes
heading and dragging the beginning balance transactions to the Income Cash Pool.
175. How do I fund in the middle of the month?
Unless it is the beginning of the month, you will likely not be able to use one of the profiles
created in your spending plan the first time you put money into your envelopes. In this case,
you will have to manually fund your envelopes, entering in the amounts for each envelope
that you plan on spending before the end of the month.
In order to manually fund your envelopes, click on the Fund icon at the top of the
application. This will bring up a funding window. Select the second option, and then enter in
the amounts for each envelope that you plan on spending before the end of the month. When
you are finished, click "Fund" and the money will be divided among the envelopes based on
the amounts you entered. You are then ready to begin spending from these accounts.
As you receive additional paychecks during the month, you can simply leave them in the
Income Cash Pool by selecting the first option in the funding window. Then, at the first of the
month, you can fund your envelopes for that month using the income from the previous
month
You may also want to set up a funding plan to help you meet your monthly funding goals on
a paycheck-by-paycheck basis.
176. How did I get a Money For Envelope?
When you add a new account and designate it as a credit card account, a Money For group
will automatically be created and an envelope will be added for that credit card.
A Money For envelope is designed to show you how much money you have set aside to pay
on your credit card. You can fund a Money For envelope if you wish to pay down a preexisting balance. However, you cannot assign purchase transactions to a Money For
envelope. Money will be automatically reallocated from your spending envelopes to this
envelope as you assign purchases made with the associated credit card.
177. How much do I fund in the 'Money For' Envelope?
If you carry a balance on your credit card from month to month, you should fund the Money
For envelope based on the amount you plan to pay on the principal that month. Say, for
example, that you have a credit card with a -$2000 balance and you plan to make the
minimum monthly payment of $50 that month. At first, your Money For envelope balance
will be $0, so you should fund the Money For envelope with $50.
If you pay your credit card balances off each month, then there is no need to fund the Money
For envelopes. This is because as you spend on the card, the Money For envelope will
increase to match the balance on the card, and when you pay it off each month, the balance
will go down to $0.
178. Reallocating to a Money For Envelope
A purchase transaction made using a credit card is assigned exactly like a purchase using a
debit card or a check. Click on the transaction, drag it to the desired spending envelope, and
release.
Though you treat the transaction exactly the same as a purchase made using a debit card, our
money management application does not.
Say you have funded your Money For envelope for your minimum monthly payment of $50,
and then you use your credit card to make a -$25 purchase at a grocery store. When that -$25
transaction downloads, you assign it to your Groceries envelope. The application then
automatically subtracts $25 from your Groceries envelope and adds it to your Money For
envelope for that credit card. This will show that you should actually pay $75 on your credit
card, not just the $50 that you budgeted.
Just as money is automatically moved to the Money For envelope as you make purchases on
your credit card, it will be automatically removed when you record a credit card payment.
179. Using Funding Profiles
When you create a funding plan, you save a funding profile for each of your expected pay
dates. You can also click the Save Profile button when manually funding your envelopes to
create and name a custom profile.
You can then select this new profile later to use it again.
Once you select a saved profile, you can still edit it before funding. Once you click "Fund,"
the money is then allocated to each envelope based on the amounts in the funding profile.
180. What is meant by the 'Home Page' when I am logged in to the
application?
The Home page is the default view. In this view you can look at quick view reports, see if
you have new or unassigned transactions, and view system alert messages.
Quick View Reports – From the Home page you can quickly view a number of short
summary reports that allow you to look at envelope balances in certain categories, such as
your monthly discretionary envelope spending accounts. Simply click on the dropdown menu
in the middle field of the right windowpane. Select a category from the dropdown menu, and
the information in the quick view field will change.
Message Center – At the far right side of the right windowpane you will find the message
center, where you will find useful links and announcements of new features
Unassigned Transactions – At the top of the right windowpane, your New Transactions
folder will show the number of new or unassigned transactions you have. Any new purchases,
payments or deposits that you have made will show up here as soon as they aggregate from
your accounts. If you have any pending manual transactions, they will also be listed here.
Click on the number shown to be directed to the register, where you can assign new
transactions or match them to manual transactions.
181. What is a transaction?
Each time you make a purchase or deposit, pay a bill, or make a withdrawal, a transaction
will appear in the New Transactions register. Each of these transactions will need to be
assigned. This activity is the basis for your daily interaction with Mvelopes, and allows you
to create a real-time view of your actual spending.
Assigning your transactions as they are collected from each of your financial institutions and
credit card companies allows you to have the information necessary to make informed
spending decisions on a daily basis.
Occasionally, you may also need to edit or change a transaction
182. How do transactions come in to the application?
Transactions are automatically retrieved from your financial institutions each day. New
transactions are displayed in the New Transactions register . If you are aware of transactions
that have not shown up after two days, please notify Customer Support, as there may be an
issue with one or more of your accounts.
You can also have Mvelopes retrieve your transactions at any time by clicking "Refresh" in
the Spending Accounts window.
To refresh accounts for just one institution, click "Manage."
The Account Manager window will appear.
Click the Refresh icon next to an institution's name to refresh all of the accounts held at that
institution. The refresh button is two arrows in the shape of a circle.
183. How do I track cash transactions?
There are two common ways of tracking cash transactions within Mvelopes Personal.
1. First, you can set up an offline account and enter in each transaction manually. To do
this, go to the New Transactions register and click "New" in the menu bar under the
Pending Transactions section. Enter the transaction information and click "Save."
The transaction will automatically be assigned to the envelope you selected and the
envelope balance and offline account balance will be updated.
2. If you repeatedly spend cash in a specific envelope category, another common method
for tracking the cash you spend is to simply assign the entire cash withdrawal to the
envelope instead of transferring it to an offline cash account.
For example, if you give your child $20.00 every other week for school lunch, instead
of manually entering in a $2.00 cash transaction for school lunch each day, you can
simply withdraw $20.00 from your checking account every other week and assign the
withdrawal to the school lunch envelope. Unless you (or your children) spend the cash
on something other than school lunch, you don't have to worry about manually
entering in any transactions.
184. How do I assign Transactions?
To assign your transactions to a spending account, or envelope, you must first select them.If
you have multiple transactions to assign to one envelope, you can select them by holding
down the Control (Ctrl) key while you click on each desired transaction.
Once you have selected the applicable transaction(s), there are two ways you can assign them
to an envelope:
•
•
Simply drag the item(s) to the appropriate envelope. If you are trying to assign a
transaction to an account or envelope that will not accept it, the cursor icon will
change to a stop symbol to signify this. Once the desired envelope is selected, release
the mouse button, and your transaction(s) will be reassigned.
Click the Assign option in the menu at the top of the right windowpane. This will
launch a popup window displaying your envelope accounts. Select the envelope to
which you would like to assign the transaction(s), and then click the OK button.
185. How do I assign an expense (purchase) Transactions?
To assign an expense transaction to one of your envelope spending accounts, go to the New
Transactions register. You can get to the New Transactions register either by clicking on the
New Transactions folder in the left windowpane, or by clicking on the number of unassigned
or pending transactions in the Unassigned Transactions section of your Home page.
In the right windowpane of the New Transactions screen you will see a list of all of your new
transactions.
Assign the transactions to the appropriate envelope spending accounts. For example, if you
have a new transaction from your dinner out last weekend, assign that transaction to your
"Eating Out" envelope.
186. How do I assign a deposit transaction?
When you receive a deposit transaction in your New Transactions register, you can do one of
three things:
1. Assign the transaction directly to an envelope. To do this, either click on it and select
"Assign" from the menu bar, or drag it directly to your desired envelope.
2. Split the transaction among several envelopes. To do this, click on the transaction and
select "Split" from the menu bar.
3. Add it to the Income Cash Pool. To do this, drag it to the Income Cash Pool envelope
located under the New Transactions envelope in the Envelopes section of the left
windowpane.
The third option (dropping it in the Income Cash Pool) is the most common, and will bring up
the Income Deposit Options window with these options:
1.
•
•
•
Save for Later Envelope Funding
Manually fund one or more envelopes
Fund using a saved profile
Save for Later Envelope Funding – This method assigns the deposit transaction to the
Income Cash Pool for later envelope funding. Deposits will accumulate there throughout the
month so that at the beginning of the next month, you will have the funds ready for allocation
to your envelopes. To execute this option, select "Save for later envelope funding" and click
"OK."
Manually Fund One or More Envelopes – Selecting this option allows you to manually
fund several envelopes. This option is usually selected if you have not created a funding
profile for this deposit. Examples of deposits that would not have profiles are rebate checks
or money received as a gift. Selecting "Manually fund one or more envelopes" will display
the current envelope balance, the funding goal, and the amount already funded to that
envelope during the current month. You can:
1. enter the exact amount you want to put in the envelope;
2. enter a percentage of the transaction amount to add to the envelope; or
3. check the Remainder box, which will fund the envelope with the amount you need to
reach your funding goal for that month.
When you are finished, click "Fund."
Fund Using a Saved Profile – Selecting this option allows you to auto-fund using a
predefined profile. This option is usually selected if you have previously defined a funding
profile for the deposit you wish to assign. For instance, if you only fund once each month, it
is the monthly amounts you entered in your spending plan. To execute this option, select the
"Fund using a saved profile" option, and select the profile you wish to use from the dropdown
menu. You can then edit the amounts for each envelope. Click "Fund" when you are finished.
187. How do I assign a purchase that I made on a credit card?
Purchases made using a credit card are assigned exactly the same way as purchases made
using a debit card, check or any other form of payment. If you use your credit card to
purchase groceries, you would simply drag and drop the transaction into your "Groceries"
envelope.
However, although you treat credit card purchase transactions the same as any other purchase
transaction, the applciation does not. When you assign a credit card purchase to an
envelope, the application automatically removes the purchase amount from the envelope and
places it in the "Money For" envelope tied to that specific credit card.
This is because when you spend with a credit card, the money is not immediately withdrawn
from your account. Because the money has been spent, but is still in your account, the money
is removed from your envelope to reflect a more accurate envelope balance.
188. How do I assign a credit card payment?
The most intuitive way to assign payments made to a credit card is to use the Credit card
payments clearing house envelope (titled 'credit card payments' and found under the money
for group) but you can also drag the transactions directly to the appropriate account.
Each time you make a payment to a credit card, you are essentially making an account to
account transfer (i.e. you are taking money from a bank account and transferring it to a credit
card account). Because there are two accounts involved (i.e. your bank account and your
credit card account) there will be two transactions received in the New Transactions screen:
1. a transaction recording the withdrawal from the bank account; and
2. a transaction recording the payment received by the credit card account.
To properly record a credit card payment, select one of these two transactions in the New
Transactions screen. Notice which account is represented by this transaction (either the bank
account or the credit card account).
Click and drag the transaction to the Spending Accounts section of the left windowpane.
Drop the transaction into the same account represented by the transaction.
This will pop up the "Transfer Window." Once the Transfer Window is displayed, select the
appropriate "Transfer To" account and click "OK."
The balances of both accounts will be updated and the money will be removed from the
Money For envelope.
There will also be a new pending transaction to represent the other half of the transfer. This
transaction is created immediately in order to keep your account balances up-to-date.
However, in order to avoid recording the transaction twice, you will need to match this
pending transaction with the electronic version when it appears in your New Transactions
register. (Depending on your financial institution, it may take a few days before this other
transaction shows up.)
To match these two transactions, click on each of them so that both are highlighted. Then
click "Match" in the menu bar of the Pending Transactions box.
Both transactions will be cleared from the screen.
189. How do I assign credit card finance/interest/service fees?
When interest or service fees are incurred on your credit card, the amount will show up in
your New Transaction Register as a transaction. You will need to assign these transactions to
an envelope, just as you would any other transaction. Most people choose to create an
envelope designated specifically for this purpose (either creating an envelope for each card,
or one envelope for all of their credit cards). This envelope will need to be funded.
Please note that you cannot assign transactions to a Money For envelope, as this envelope is
designed only for debt repayment. When you pay down or pay off your credit card, the
money is then taken from this envelope automatically.
For example, if you owe $200 on your ABC Bank Credit Card, and then a service fee of $20
is charged to your card, a new transaction in the amount of $20 will show up in your New
Transactions register. Once you assign the $20 to your Service Fees envelope (or another
envelope of your choosing), $20 will be removed from the Service Fees envelope and placed
in the Money For: ABC Bank Credit Card envelope, bringing the total to $220—the exact
amount owed on the card.
When you make a payment to either pay off or pay down the balance of the credit card, the
payment amount is automatically removed from the Money For: ABC Bank Credit Card
envelope.
190. How do I reverse or move a transaction I accidentally assigned
to an incorrect envelope?
If you assign a transaction to the wrong envelope, or simply change your mind, it’s easy to
move it to another envelope.
First, select the transaction you wish to move. To do this, click on the envelope to which you
assigned the transaction. Once the register opens in the right windowpane, click on the
transaction you wish to move.
You can then reassign the transaction by simply dragging and dropping it to a new envelope.
This will move the transaction to the other envelope and automatically update the balance of
each envelope.
191. How can I change the Payee information?
Sometimes you may have transactions that display payee names that are either too long,
include unnecessary information, or that do not have enough description as to where the
transaction took place. For example, a transaction payee may only include the physical
address of where the transaction took place, such as “1234 SOUTH PINE STREET
ANYTOWN NYUS” instead of “Bob’s Grocery Store.” Another example might be a Bill Pay
transaction that shows, “24592621T5SVTA8TS HOMETOWN ELECTR (ONLINE PMT)”
while you would prefer it to display as, “Hometown Electric.” When this happens, you may
find it useful to change the Payee name to one that you will recognize.
To make the Payee name editable, you can simply double-click it. If you prefer, you can
highlight it by clicking it once, and then select “Edit” from the menu bar at the top of the left
windowpane. Once you have selected the field, type your changes into it and click “Save.”
Your edits will be recorded and the field will return to its non-editable state.
You can follow this same process to edit the information in the Date, Payment/Deposit, or
Account.
You may also wish to have your payee names automatically renamed when they are
retrieved. You can do this by setting up a rule using the transaction rules manager.
192. How can I note a transaction for personal reference?
Adding note information to a transaction can help remind you what was purchased or what
service was performed. To add this information, double-click the desired transaction to
highlight it and expand the Note field.
Once you have completed your note, click the Save button. The information will save and the
window will close. To view the saved note, roll the cursor over the Note field, and a popup
window will appear with the full note.
View, Edit, or Delete a Note – Once you have created a note you can go back and view, edit
or make changes to it by double-clicking on the transaction. Click "Save" to save the changes
or "Cancel" to exit without saving.
*The Notes field has a limit of 255 characters.
193. How do I make transactions automatically assign themselves to
the appropriate spending envelope and/or rename a specific payee
each time there is a transaction for that payee?
You can use the Transaction Rules Manager to automatically rename or assign your
transactions as they are retrieved.
1. First, select the Transaction Rules Manager under the Tools menu.
Any rules you have previously set up will be displayed. They will be applied in the
order listed, and you can change the order by using the Move Up and Move Down
buttons. You can also choose to delete, edit, or immediately run a rule from this
window.
2. To create a new rule, click the New button.
3. Create a name for your rule to help you remember it so you can manage it later.
4. Enter text in the "Payee contains" field. For example, if you want to create a rule to
apply to all your transactions from Mary's Clothing Store, you might enter "MARY"
in this field. You can click the plus sign button to add more "Payee contains" fields.
For example, if you know that your transactions from another branch of Mary's
Clothing Store show up as being from CLOTHSTOREPARENTCOTRANS#67893,
you may wish to add another "Payee contains" field for the same rule, and enter
"CLOTHSTOREPARENTCO." You can use the minus sign button to remove
unwanted "Payee contains" fields.
5. Use the dropdown menu to select an action type.
• If you select "Rename Payee to," you may then enter the text you would like
the system to use when automatically renaming your applicable transactions.
For example, if you create a rule with "MARY" in the "Payee contains" field
and "Mary's Clothing" in the "Rename Payee To" field, then the system will
automatically rename a payee name retrieved as "MARYCLO247TRANS456"
to "Mary's Clothing."
You will still be able to see the original Payee name when you mouse over a
renamed transaction until it is assigned.
•
If you select "Assign to," you may then select an envelope to which you would
like the applicable transactions to be automatically assigned, such as "Personal
Care:Clothing."
6. When you first log on, the system will show you any automatically assigned
transactions in the "Auto Assigned Transactions" register. Until you have accepted an
automatically assigned transaction, it will appear in bold text in both the Auto
Assigned Transactions register and in the envelope to which it was assigned. You can
accept it by clicking on it. You may also choose to accept all your automatically
assigned transactions at once by selecting "Accept All" in the Auto Assigned
Transactions register.
7. If you don't agree with the way a transaction was automatically assigned, you can
drag it to your preferred envelope, or you can simply undo the assignment by
dragging it to the New Transactions register.
194. Pending Transactions
The Pending Transactions section is located at the bottom of the New Transactions register.
Here, you may create a new manual transaction.
The application will also automatically create a pending transaction when you assign an
account to account transfer or a payment to a credit card.
The purpose of the Pending Transactions section is to keep your accounts in balance. When a
transaction is created in this section, the corresponding account registers and balances will be
updated to reflect the transaction.
If you manually create a transaction for an offline account, it will clear immediately.
However, pending transactions (whether manual or automatic) for online accounts are
designed to stay in the Pending Accounts section until the electronic transaction is received
from your financial institution. You can then highlight each transaction and click "Match" in
the Pending Transactions window.
Both transactions will be cleared from the screen. This will keep your account registers from
recording the same transaction twice.
195. How do I match manual transactions?
As soon as you manually enter a transaction for an online account you have added, the
transaction will be assigned to the appropriate envelope and account registers and appear in
the pending transactions section of the New Transactions register.
Once the transaction is retrieved from your financial institution, it will need to be matched to
the pending transaction in order to avoid a duplicate transaction. To match the manually
created transaction with the retrieved transaction, click once on the transaction in the Pending
Transactions section and then click on it once in the New Transactions register so both
transactions are highlighted. Then click "Match" in the menu bar under Pending Transactions.
Both transactions will be cleared from the New Transactions screen. If you view the register
for the envelope to which you assigned this transaction (in this case, your Groceries
envelope), you will see the manually-entered version of this transaction.
196. Why is there a blue 'match' in the new transactions register?
When the system retrieves a transaction that is similar to one of your pending transactions, the new
transaction will be marked with the word "Match" in blue text.
If you click on the new transaction, it will be highlighted, along with the suggested pending
transaction. (A popup box will alert you to this, and you can simply click OK to acknowledge, or check
the box marked "Do not show me this again.")
If you agree that the two transactions should be matched, click "Match" in the Pending Transactions
register to complete the match. You can also click "Match All" to accept all the proposed matches at
once.
197. How do I match account to account transfers?
Each time you transfer money from one account to another, there will be two transactions
received in the New Transactions register:
•
•
a transaction recording the withdrawal from the account the money is coming from; and
a transaction recording the deposit to the account the money is going to.
To properly record an account-to-account transfer, select one of the transactions in the New
Transactions screen. Notice the account that is represented by this transaction.
Click and drag the transaction to the Spending Accounts section of the left windowpane.
Drop the transaction into the same account represented by the transaction. (Drag the savings
account half of the transaction to the savings account).
This will pop up the Transfer Window. Once the Transfer Window is displayed, select the
appropriate Transfer From and Transfer To account, then click "OK."
The balance and register of each account will automatically be updated to reflect the transfer.
Since you only used one of the two transactions in your New Transactions register, you still
have one transaction representing the transfer in your New Transactions folder. (Depending
on your financial institution, it may take a few days before this other transaction shows up.) A
manual transfer transaction will also be created. This manual transfer transaction will appear
in the Pending Transactions section. When the other half of the transaction is received in the
New Transactions screen, find the corresponding transaction in the Pending Transactions
section. Highlight both transactions and click "Match" in the menu at the top of the Pending
Transactions section.
Both transactions will be cleared from the New Transactions screen.
198. Can I delete a transaction that is downloaded?
Deleting a transaction can easily be done by selecting the item and clicking on the Delete
button. However, you should avoid doing this whenever possible, as it may cause accounts to
have incorrect balances. Unless the transaction is a duplicate transaction, deleting it will
result in an inaccurate account register balance within the application. This is due to the fact
that account balances within the system are calculated as transactions are assigned. The
online balance (as shown in the Net Worth Summary and in the right windowpane when the
account register is open) will show the current online balance as posted by your financial
institution
199. Can I undo something I just did?
The Undo button on the menu bar can be used to undo or reverse certain actions. Not all
actions can be reversed or undone. The button is disabled (grayed out) if the last action
performed cannot be undone.
Actions that can be undone include:
•
•
•
•
•
Deleting transactions from the New Transactions register
Splitting a transaction
Account-to-account transfers
Matching pending transactions
Clearing pending transactions
200. How can I edit my spending plan?
You can either edit the spending plan allocation for all future months, or you can edit a single
month at a time.
To edit each month going forward, select the Spending Plan icon, select View, Monthly
Average view. Click once on the envelope to highlight it, and then edit the amount in the blue
column at the left. Click "Apply" to apply the changes to every envelope in that row.
To edit the amount for a single month, double-click on the amount allocated for the
envelope in that particular month. This will open a box allowing you to edit the amount. Once
you have edited the amount, you can move to the next envelope in that month by hitting the
Enter key, or to another line by double-clicking in that field. When all your adjustments have
been made, you can click "Save" to close the window. You can also move to the next month's
amount by using the tab button on your keyboard.
Be sure to watch the number in the Total Envelopes field while you are making changes, to
ensure that your spending plan is balanced, and that you are spending within your income.
201. What is the purpose of the money for envelopes?
Our money management application is designed to help you pay off any new credit card
transactions that occur each month. With expensive service charges and interest rates as high
as 30%, most financial experts agree that one of the single most important things you can do
for your financial fitness is to pay off your credit cards in full each month.
When you assign a credit card purchase to a spending envelope, the application reallocates
that exact amount to a Money For envelope, which is set aside for repaying that credit card.
In effect, it is set aside so that you’re not tempted to spend it elsewhere. When the bill comes
due, the money is sitting in the Money For envelope, ready to pay the bill in full.
After you make a payment to your credit card and then record the transaction in the
application, the amount of your credit card payment will be automatically deducted from your
Money For envelope for that credit card.
202. What is meant by 'clearing house envelopes' ?
"Clearinghouse envelopes” were designed to help you keep your accounts in balance when
performing transactions that involve more than one account.
Your account is automatically created with envelopes labeled “Credit Card Payments” and
“Account Transfers.”
You can hide or unhide these envelopes in your preferences. First, select “Preference” under
the File menu.
Then check the “Hide Credit Card Payments and Account Transfers envelopes” box to hide
these envelopes from view, or uncheck it to display them.
Note that checking this box will only hide an envelope if the balance is $0.00.
203. Credit card payments envelope
When you make a payment to a credit card, you will see two transactions in your New
Transactions Register: one representing the payment from your checking account, and one
representing the deposit to your credit card account. Remember that these transactions may
appear several days apart, depending on how long it takes for them to be processed by your
financial institutions.
To assign these transactions, you can drag them to the Credit Card Payments clearinghouse
envelope.
When you've assigned one transaction, the credit card envelope will go negative by that
amount to indicate that the other half of the transaction still needs to be assigned. Any time
this envelope is negative, it’s a flag that you’re still waiting for a transaction; the goal should
always be to keep this envelope at zero.
After you've assigned the other half of the transfer, the envelope will go to zero, and your
spending account balances will also be updated appropriately.
You can also assign credit card payments by dragging them to the appropriate spending
accounts (see credit card payments).
204. What is the Account Transfers Envelope?
When you make a transfer from one online account to another online account, two transactions will
appear in your New Transactions register: one representing each account. Remember that these
transactions may appear several days apart, depending on how long it takes for them to be processed
by your financial institutions.
To assign these transactions, you can drag them to the Account Transfers clearinghouse
envelope.
After you drag the first half of the transaction to the account transfers envelope, the envelope will
show a negative or positive balance (depending on which transaction you assigned). Once you've
assigned the other half of the transfer, the envelope balance will show zero, and the balance of your
spending account balances will be updated appropriately. Any time this envelope has negative or
positive balance, it’s a flag that you’re still waiting for a transaction; the goal should always be to keep
this envelope at zero.
After you've assigned the other half of the transfer, the envelope will go to zero, and your
spending account balances will be updated appropriately.
You can also assign account transfers by dragging them to the appropriate spending accounts
(see account to account transfers or the tutorials).
205. Envelope Registers
Each envelope has an envelope register. When you click on an envelope in the left
windowpane under the Envelopes heading, the register for that envelope will open in the right
windowpane. The register contains all transactions assigned to that envelope.
The register shows the previous 30 days by default, but you can change the display period by
selecting any of the periods in the dropdown menu.
206. How can I group my envelopes?
It is often easier to track your spending by having similar costs grouped together. For
example, you may group all your household bills such as electricity, gas, telephone, and
water/sewer/garbage under "Utilities." These items would all be classified as Monthly
Required Expenses. You may also have other Utilities envelopes for Monthly Discretionary
Expenses such as cable, mobile phone, or internet.
Create a Group – Creating a new group for your envelopes is very simple. Select
"New" from the menu bar above the envelopes. This will open the Create/Edit
Envelope window. Click on the dropdown menu under "Group Name" and click the
New button.
Enter the name for your new envelope group and click "Save." You can add a new
envelope if you wish, and then click "Save" when you are done.
Change a Group Name – To change a group name, simply select the group name that
you want to edit by clicking once on it with your left mouse button. Once you have the
group name selected, click "Edit" in the menu bar above the envelopes. Change the
name as desired and click "Save."
Move Spending Envelopes from one Group to Another – Should you decide to
move an envelope from one group to another, this can be done very easily. Simply
click on the envelope you want to move and drag and drop the envelope into the new
group. All envelopes are arranged alphabetically if they are not part of a group.
207. How can I edit an existing envelope?
To edit an existing envelope, simply click once on the envelope you want to change so it is
highlighted. Then click the Edit button in the menu above. The Create/Edit Envelope window
will appear. Make the desired changes and click "Save."
To change the amount of money allocated to an envelope in the spending plan, you will need
to go into the spending plan by clicking on the Spend Plan
amount and click "Save."
icon in the tool bar. Edit the
208. How can I add a new envelope?
You can add new envelopes in two different places:
•
Within the Spending Plan: To add another envelope while in the Spending Plan
, click "New" in the menu bar and select "Envelope" from the dropdown menu.
A popup window will appear. Type in the envelope name and select a group if
appropriate, and then select monthly or periodic and required or discretionary.
Click "Save" when you are finished.
•
From the left windowpane under the Envelopes heading: To add a new envelope,
click "New" in the menu.
When the popup window appears, type in the name of the new envelope. Click "Save"
when you are finished.
209. How can I delete an envelope?
If you need to eliminate an envelope, simply select the envelope and then click "Delete" in
the menu bar. This will allow you to control the number of envelope accounts in your
spending plan. Envelopes need to have a zero balance before they can be deleted.
210. Sweeping envelopes
As you better manage your money, you will likely find you have money remaining in some
envelopes at the end of the month (or whatever funding period you use). You may choose to
apply this money to savings, debt reduction, or investments. The process of moving this
money from its original envelopes to apply it elsewhere is referred to as "sweeping your
envelopes."
To sweep your envelopes, simply click on the 'sweep' option under the word 'envelopes' and
select which envelopes you would like to sweep to zero and where you would like to put that
left over money. Be sure to leave the balance in your periodic spending envelopes, such as
auto maintenance, medical, holiday gifts or back to school supplies since those balances
likely need to accrue.
211. What are the spending accounts?
In the Spending Accounts section of the application's Home page (found at the bottom of the
left windowpane), you will manage your bank, credit, store, and cash accounts. In this area
you will be able to add, edit, or delete accounts, check your account balances, and see recent
activity, as well as manually record account-to-account transfers for both online and offline
accounts.
Online Accounts
Online accounts are accounts that link to the system through a secure connection to enable
the system to download or collect all of your transactions in that account. You can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Add an online account
Edit an online account
Delete an online account
Transfer funds between online accounts
View the balance and transactions from the account register
Create manual transactions
Reconcile an online account
Offline Accounts
An offline account is an account that has no online link to a financial institution. Most offline
accounts will be cash accounts. If you have a store account that does not have online access
and you want to continue using that account within the system, you can create an offline
account. It will have the same properties as a cash account and you will need to enter all
transactions manually to track your spending in this account. You can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Add an Offline Account
Edit an offline account
Delete an offline account
Offline account to account transfers
Offline account registers
Manual Transactions for offline accounts
Reconcile an offline account
212. Where can I find my account register?
You can view account registers by clicking on the account in the left windowpane under the
Spending Accounts heading. This will bring up the account register in the right windowpane.
By default, the account register displays all transactions in that account during the last 30
days. You can change the time period by selecting any of the options in the dropdown menu
as shown below.
In the account register you can view the account balance, reconcile the account, or create,
edit, or delete manual transactions.
213. How can I check that my account balance in the application is
the same as my account balance at the financial institution?
Each account register displays both an online balance and a register balance. The online
balance is the current account balance as posted by the financial institution.
The online balance can differ from the register balance because the register balance only
includes transactions that have been assigned to an envelope. If there are transactions in
your New Transactions folder or if you have deleted any transactions from Mvelopes, the
register balance will be off by the amount of those transactions.
214. How can I check if the balance shown in the applciation is the
same as the balance my financial institution has?
Each account register displays both an online balance and a register balance. The register
balance is the current account balance based on all assigned transactions.
The register balance can differ from the online balance because the online balance is the
current account balance as posted by the financial institution. Because the register balance
only includes assigned transactions, if there are any transactions in your New Transactions
folder or if you have deleted any transactions from Mvelopes, the register balance will be off
by the amount of those transactions.
215. How do I create a manual transaction in the account register?
To create a manual transaction from within an account register, simply select the New option
in the menu bar of the right windowpane. This will create a new line in the register field. The
date is entered automatically as the date you create the transaction; this can be changed with
the calendar function or by typing a date manually. To move from field to field within the
line, you can use the Tab key or simply click in the next field with your mouse. When you
have finished entering the data, click "Save."
216. How can I edit a manual transaction?
To edit a manual transaction, or any transaction in an account register, select the transaction
and then click the Edit option in the menu at the top of the right windowpane. This will make
the whole line an editable field. To move from field to field, you can use the Tab key or
simply click on the field you want to change. When your changes are complete, click "Save."
217. How do I manage my spending accounts?
To manage your spending accounts, select the Manage option in the Spending Accounts
menu bar.
The Account Manager window will appear. Here you will see the latest balances for your
accounts as downloaded from your financial institutions, as well as the time of the last
attempted download.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Refresh Account – Click the Refresh icon
next to an institution's name to refresh
all of the accounts held at that institution.
Refresh All Accounts – Click the Refresh All Accounts button at the bottom of the
window to automatically retrieve any new transactions and updated balances for all
your online accounts.
Edit Account – Click the Edit icon next to an institution's name to bring up the
Setup window where you can edit an online account or edit an offline account.
Add Another Account – Click the Add Another Account button at the bottom of the
window to pop up the Add Accounts Wizard.
Log in to Account – Click the Login link to the right of the screen to log in directly
to your account on your financial institution's website.
Status and Message columns – If the last attempted download was successful, the
Status column will be blank, and the Message column will say "Update Successful."
If there were any errors in retrieving transaction and balance information, a status icon
and message will alert you to the error. For certain errors, a link will be provided to
allow you to submit an error ticket directly to Customer Support.
User Action Required – These errors are usually due to a changed or incorrect
password, or other minor errors which you are usually able to solve yourself.
You can click on the icon or on the message link for directions on how to do so.
Work in Progress – This icon means that Customer Support is aware of the
issue and is currently working toward a resolution. An expected resolution date
and time will be displayed in the message column for this account. You can
select whether or not to be notified once the problem is resolved.
Submit a Ticket – Trouble tickets for accounts with this status icon can be
directly submitted to Customer Support. You will be notified once the problem
has been resolved.
218. How do I edit an online spending account?
To edit an online spending account, select the Manage option in the Spending Accounts menu bar.
The Account Manager window will appear.
Click the Edit icon next to an online institution's name to bring up the Account Setup
window.
Make any desired changes in the fields provided, and click "Submit" to continue. You will
then be asked to confirm the changes. Click "Submit" again, and the account information will
be updated.
You can also click the Delete button to delete the account(s).
219. How do I edit an offline spending account?
To edit or update an offline non-spending or net worth only account, select the Manage
option in the Spending Accounts menu bar.
The Account Manager window will appear.
Click the Edit icon next to an offline account's name to bring up the Offline Account Setup
window.
You can edit the balance of non-Spending accounts, the account name, the account number,
and the account type. Simply type in the updated information and click "Finish."
*The balances of offline Spending accounts can only be edited from the Spending Accounts
Register by either creating manual transactions or modifying the value of the starting balance.
220. How do I delete an online account?
To delete an online spending account, select the Manage option in the Spending Accounts
menu bar.
The Account Manager window will appear.
Click the Edit icon next to an online institution's name to bring up the Account Setup
window.
You can then click the Delete icon next to an account's name to delete that account, or you
can click the Delete Accounts button at the top of the screen to delete all accounts at that
institution.
You will see a popup that asks you if you are sure you want to delete. Pay attention to this
because there is no way to retrieve a deleted account. If you change your mind, you will have
to re-add the account by following the add account instructions.
If you are sure that you want to delete the account, click "OK," and the account will be
deleted.
221. How do I delete an offline account?
To delete an offline spending account, select the Manage option in the Spending Accounts
menu bar.
The Account Manager window will appear.
Click the Delete icon
next to an offline account's name.
You will see a popup that asks you if you are sure you want to delete this account. Pay
attention to this because there is no way to retrieve a deleted account. If you change your
mind, you will have to re-add the account by following the add account instructions.
If you are sure that you want to delete the account, click "OK," and the account will be
deleted.
222. How do I transfer between offline accounts?
To record a transfer that you have already made from one offline account to another offline
account, simply click "Transfer" in the menu at the top of the right windowpane.
This action will launch the Transfer Window. In the menus, select the two accounts that this
transfer will affect. The current balance will show beneath each account as it is selected.
Finally, simply enter the amount to transfer and click the OK button at the bottom of the
popup window. A transaction reflecting this transfer will appear in the account register for
each of the two affected accounts.
223. How do I record a transfer between an online account and an
offline account?
Occasionally you will have to transfer money between an online account and an offline
account.
First, click "Account Transfer" in the menu bar of the Pending Transactions box in the New
Transactions register .
This will bring up the Transfer Window. Enter the two accounts affected by the transfer and
the transfer amount, then click "OK."
The balance and register of each account will be automatically updated, and a manual
transaction will be created for only the online account. This manual transaction will appear in
the Pending Transactions section of the New Transactions register. When the transaction for
the online account is downloaded and appears in the New Transactions register, simply click
on the new transaction and the manual transaction so that each is highlighted, and then click
"Match" in the menu bar of the Pending Transactions section. Both transactions will
disappear.
Note: If you make a purchase that includes "cash back," you can record the transfer to your
cash account as part of a split transaction. When you assign the appropriate line in the Split
Window, simply select the cash account in the Envelopes dropdown. (The cash account will
be listed at the bottom of your envelopes, after a space).
224. How can I force my accounts to refresh (update)?
When you click the Refresh link in the Spending Accounts window, Mvelopes will
automatically refresh each of your spending accounts, retrieving any new transactions to be
assigned.
If you only want to refresh some of your accounts, you can do that by clicking "Manage".
225. What will the current envelope balance report show me?
This report will show you current envelope balances. The report will display the remaining
amount in each envelope so you always know how much is left to spend in all areas of your
spending plan.
226. What will the Cash Flow Report show me?
The Cash Flow Report allows you to compare your planned income with your amount funded
and your actual expenses for each category during a specified period. This can help you
determine areas where your spending plan may need adjustment.
This report has both a Summary and a Detailed version.
Summary – The summary shows the total dollar amounts for your planned income, amount
funded, and actual expenses in each category during a specified period. This will help you
determine whether you are spending within your income.
Detailed – The detailed version of the report allows you to compare the individual
transactions that make up your planned income, amount funded, and actual expenses. This
can help you see which specific expenses have caused you to spend more or less than your
planned (or funded) amounts. You can review the envelope-to-envelope transfer history for a
particular envelope to see where you have required funds from other envelopes in order to
deal with overspending in another envelope. This will help you decide which spending
envelopes may need more funding and which expenses you may want to cut.
227. What will the Spending by Month report show me?
This report will show a summary of how you spent your money during a 12-month period.
The report will allow you to review where your money was spent and see the overspending or
underspending trends for each envelope.
This report does not include envelope-to-envelope transfers, so overspending is not masked
because of amounts that are transferred from other envelopes to cover extra expenses. This
will provide you with an actual view of the amount spent in comparison to your spending
plan so you can adjust your income allocations to reflect your spending needs.
228. What will the transactions report show me?
This report will allow you to review all transactions for a selected envelope or group of
envelopes during a given time period.
You can select an envelope category (such as Monthly Required or Periodic Discretionary),
or you can manually select which envelopes to include
229. What will the Monthly Funding and Spending report show me?
This report will compare your funding goal with the amount you actually funded and the
amount you spent. It will then show you the difference between the amount you funded and
the amount you spent.
230. What will the Transaction by Payee report show me?
This report will show all transactions involving a specific payee, so that you don't have to
search through every envelope to figure out how you assigned a transaction.
You can either select a specific account or search all linked accounts, and you can designate a
date range.
* note: this report is very specific. If you are looking for Mcdonalds and use an apostrophe, it
will not locate any Mcdonalds transactions unless they have the apostrophe in the same place
you entered it in your search
231. What will the Account Register Report show me?
This report will show all transactions within an account during a specified period.
It has both a Summary and a Detailed version.
Detailed – The detailed report allows you to select either a specific account or all
accounts. It displays each transaction detail for the selected account(s), as well as a
running balance.
Summary– The summary report shows an account's online balance, register balance,
and any difference between the two. The register balance for an account will only
include transactions that you have assigned to it, so it may differ from the online
account balance if you still have transactions in your New Transactions register, or if
you deleted any transactions.
232. What will the Deposit Account to Envelope Comparison Report
show me?
This report shows the balance of each envelope and the sum total of all these balances, as
well as the balance of each deposit account (checking, savings, money market, etc.). This
allows you to compare the balance of each account and view how that money is allocated (or
divided). This report will also let you know if your envelope numbers are equivalent to your
account numbers, or if there is a discrepancy between them.
233. What will the Net Worth report show me?
This report is a printable version of your Net Worth Summary, which is accessed by clicking
on 'tools' at the top of the application and then selecting 'net worth'. It shows the balance of
each account, and your total assets and liabilities. You can also find this in 'Reports' under
'Account Reports' and then 'Net Worth'.
234. What will the Spending Plan Report show me?
This report shows the details of your Spending Plan as you created it.
235. What will the Funding Plan Report show me?
This report shows all funding profiles that you have created, both by manual funding and in
the Spending Plan.
236. What kind of report can I run on my imported quicken data?
To import your Quicken data, click "File" in the menu bar, and then select "Import" and
"Quicken Data" from the dropdown menu.
Click the "Browse" button in the popup window and locate your Quicken files on your hard
drive. (They should be .QIF files.)*
Enter the desired name for the account you are importing and click "OK."
Once your data has been successfully imported into the system, you will see a new option in
the Reports section allowing you to generate reports on your account registers or search
specific payees. Please note that your Quicken data will only be available via these reports,
and not viewable in the envelopes or account registers of the finicity application.
* If you have not exported your data from Quicken to a .QIF file, you will need to do so
before you can import it into the finicity application.
Once you have imported your old Quicken data, you can run two types of reports on the data:
Transaction by Payee Report– This report allows you to search all transactions by
payee. You can search a specific account or all accounts, and you can select a specific
time period to search.
Account Register Report – This report will show transaction details as well as a running
balance during a specified time period.
237. What is the 'My Debts' tab in the Debt Calculator?
This section of the Debt Calculator will help you organize and keep track of all your debts.
First, you need to provide your debt information. Enter your debt name, balance, interest rate,
monthly payment, and first payment for each of your obligations. You can move from field to
field with the Tab key or by clicking in the desired field with your mouse.
When you have entered all of the data, click the Save button. Click the New Debt button to
add another debt, until all your debts are added.
Next, include your extra payments. This is the total extra amount you will apply towards debt
reduction each month, in addition to your individual monthly payments on each debt obligation.
Once your debts and additional monthly payment have been recorded, you can use the reports
buttons.
•
Summary – Clicking this button will display a report that shows you your current debt
amounts based on your principal balances, interest rates, and monthly payment amounts.
•
Elimination – Clicking this button will show you when your debts will be paid off at your
current rate of payment. It uses the debt-rolldown method. When one debt is paid off, it
assumes that you will apply that payment amount to the next debt.
•
Forecast – Clicking this button will display a popup asking you to enter the timeframe in
which you would like to be debt-free. You have the option of whether to include your
mortgage. Clicking "OK" will display a report that shows you how much you would need to
pay each month to reach that goal.
238. What is the 'Loan Calculator' tab in the debt calculator for?
The Loan Calculator section of the Debt Calculator allows you to calculate the principal
amount, interest rate, payment amount, or time to repay a loan based on the parameters you
enter. You can also easily see the impact of a one-time payment or an additional monthly
amount in paying off the loan, helping you to see the true cost of any loan you may be
considering.
239. Phones supported by Mvelopes
Most internet-enabled mobile phones are supported by the Finicity Mobile application. You
will need a phone supporting WAP 2.0 or one with native browsing capabilities. Most
internet-enabled mobile phones today meet this requirement. We also recommend a minimum
screen size of 128 x 128 pixels to avoid formatting issues. If you have specific questions
about your phone or plan, contact your service provider.
A list of most major service providers in the U.S. and Canada is below. Australia members,
please contact your local mobile phone carrier with specific questions about supported
phones.
Alltel Communications 1-8002558351
Amp’d Mobile
1-8668110091
Boost Mobile
1-8882667848
CellularOne from
1-800Dobson Cellular
934Systems
3996
Cingular Wireless
1-888333-
Cricket
Communications
Helio
MetroPCS
Qwest Wireless
Southern LINC
T-Mobile
U.S. Cellular
Verizon Wireless
Virgin Mobile
6651
1-8002742538
1-8884354675
1-8888638768
1-8888790611
1-8004060151
1-8009378997
1-8889449400
1-8009220204
1-8883221122
240. Setting preferences in the mobile application
In order to help you more quickly and easily access the information you are looking for and
to minimize the amount of manual data entry when accessing the finicity application from
your mobile phone, you can select your mobile preferences. This must be done from your
computer.
Once you have logged into the application on your computer, click on the Mobile icon
in the tool bar. This will open up the Mobile Preferences window where you can select which
envelopes you want to view when accessing they system from your mobile phone. Simply
check the box next to each envelope you want to appear. By limiting the number of envelopes
viewable within the Mobile part of the application, you will minimize the amount of
scrolling necessary to view the information you want to see when accessing the system from
your mobile phone.
While in the Mobile Preferences window, you can also enter a list of common payees for
manual transactions. You will then be able to select from this list when entering a manual
transaction from your mobile phone in order to minimize the amount of manual data entry.
This list can be revised at any time by clicking on the Mobile icon and editing the list within
the Mobile Preferences window.
241. How do I view my envelope balances in the finicity mobile
application?
To view your envelope balances within Mvelopes (or the Finicity Money Manager) Mobile,
simply log in at m.mvelopes.com (the Finicity Money Manager mobile link is coming soon,
but currently, the Mvelopes mobile link will work with your Finicity Money Manager
credentials) on your internet-enabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes username and
password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to "View Envelopes," and press "Go." *
Depending on the size of screen on your phone, you will be able to see 5 to 15 envelopes on
each screen, with the envelope balance appearing beneath the envelope name. Scroll down
and select the link in the bottom right corner of the screen to view additional envelopes.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on
each phone. For example, your phone may use "Select," "OK," or "Enter" instead of "Go." If
you need assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone, contact your mobile phone
service provider.
242. How do I view my account balances in the mobile application?
To view your account balances within Mvelopes or Finicity Money Manager Mobile, simply
log in at m.mvelopes.com (the Finicity Money Manager mobile link is coming soon, but
currently, the Mvelopes mobile link will work with your Finicity Money Manager
credentials) on your internet-enabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes or Finicity Money
Manager username and password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to "View Accounts," and press "Go." *
Depending on the screen size of your phone, anywhere from 5 to 15 accounts will appear on
each screen, with the account balance appearing beneath the name of the account. Scroll
down and select the link in the bottom right corner of the screen to view additional accounts.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on
each phone. For example, your phone may use "Select," "OK," or "Enter" instead of "Go." If
you need assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone, contact your mobile phone
service provider.
243. Viewing and assigning transactions in the mobile application
To view new transactions within Mvelopes or Finicity Money Manager Mobile, simply log in
at m.mvelopes.com (the Finicity Money Manager mobile link is coming soon, but currently,
the Mvelopes mobile link will work with your Finicity Money Manager credentials) on your
internet-enabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes or Finicity Money Manager username
and password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to "New Transactions," and press "Go." *
Depending on the size of screen on your phone, you will be able to see 5 to 15 transactions on
each screen, along with the corresponding date of the transaction, the payee, and the amount.
Scroll down and select the link in the bottom right corner of the screen to view additional
transactions.
To assign a transaction, scroll down to the transaction and check the box to the left of the
transaction by clicking "Check." * Once a check mark appears in the box, scroll down to the
dropdown menu and click "OK." This should open up the dropdown menu. Scroll down and
select the desired envelope and click "OK." Scroll down to the Assign button and click "OK."
The transaction will be assigned to that envelope.
Mvelopes Mobile adn the Finicity Money Manager are not able to split transactions between
multiple envelopes at this time.
Please be aware that any activity performed on your mobile phone is exactly the same as if it
is performed using your computer, and vice versa. There is no need to sync the information.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on
each phone. For example, your phone may use "Mark" instead of "Check," or "Select," "OK,"
or "Enter" instead of "Go." If you need assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone,
contact your mobile phone service provider.
244. Viewing and matching transactions in the mobile application
To view and assign pending transactions within Mvelopes or Finicity Money Manager Mobile, simply
log in at m.mvelopes.com (the Finicity Money Manager mobile link is coming soon, but currently, the
Mvelopes mobile link will work with your Finicity Money Manager credentials) on your internetenabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes username and password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to Pending Transactions and press "Go." * All pending transactions will appear with a box
to the left of each.
Scroll down and select the transaction you want to match and then scroll down to the Match To button
and press "Go." A new screen will show you the transaction you just selected, and list all new
transactions from the New Transactions folder below it.
Scroll down and check the transaction that matches your previously selected transaction and click on
the Match button.
The two transactions will be matched and will disappear from the registers.
Please be aware that any activity performed on your mobile phone is exactly the same as if it is
performed using your computer, and vice versa. There is no need to sync the information.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on each
phone. For example, your phone may use "Select," "OK," or "Enter" instead of "Go." If you need
assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone, contact your mobile phone service provider.
245. Creating Manual Transactions in Mvelopes Mobile
In order to enter a manual transaction into Mvelopes using your mobile phone, simply log in
at m.mvelopes.com on your internet-enabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes username
and password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to Pending Transactions, and press "Go." * Then scroll down and select the New
button and press "Go." This will open the Manual Transaction screen where you can enter the
information for the manual transaction. If you have previously entered payees from your
computer, you can select a payee from the dropdown menu or enter the payee manually.
Once you have entered the transaction information, select "Save" and the transaction will be
assigned. If the manual transaction involves an account that is linked online to Mvelopes, you
will need to match the pending transaction to the new transaction once it comes in.
Please be aware that any activity performed on your mobile phone is exactly the same as if it
is performed using your computer, and vice versa. There is no need to sync the information.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on
each phone. For example, your phone may use "Select," "OK," or "Enter" instead of "Go." If
you need assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone, contact your mobile phone
service provider.
246. Transferring between envelopes in the mobile application
To perform envelope-to-envelope transfers within Mvelopes Mobile, simply log in at
m.mvelopes.com on your internet-enabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes username and
password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to Envelope Transfer, and press "Go." * You should see the following screen:
Select which envelopes the money is coming from and going to and the amount you want to
transfer. Scroll down to the Transfer button and press "Go."
Please be aware that any activity performed on your mobile phone is exactly the same as if it
is performed using your computer, and vice versa. There is no need to sync the information.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on
each phone. For example, your phone may use "Select," "OK," or "Enter" instead of "Go." If
you need assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone, contact your mobile phone
service provider.
247. How do I assign an account to account transfer in the mobile
application?
To assign account-to-account transfers within Mvelopes Mobile, simply log in at
m.mvelopes.com on your internet-enabled mobile phone using your Mvelopes username and
password.
Once you have logged in, you should see the following screen:
Scroll down to Account Transfer, and press "Go." * You should see the following screen:
Select which accounts the money is coming from and going to and the amount you want to
transfer. You can enter a memo if you wish, then scroll down to the Transfer button and press
"Go."
Please be aware that any activity performed on your mobile phone is exactly the same as if it
is performed using your computer, and vice versa. There is no need to sync the information.
* Because each phone is different, the navigation and commands may be slightly different on
each phone. For example, your phone may use "Select," "OK," or "Enter" instead of "Go." If
you need assistance in learning how to navigate on your phone, contact your mobile phone
service provider.
248. How to add Chase accounts?
To add Chase accounts,
1. Click Add in the Spending Accounts pane.
2. Type Chase in the Search field.
3. Then click the Search button.
4. Once the bank is listed, click on its name under the institution name.
5. Enter your login credentials and click the Submit button.
6. Now it should ask you if you wish to receive the activation code via e-mail.
7. Select Yes and then click Submit.
8. Do not make any changes in the current application screen. Check your inbox for the latest
activation code. If it is not found, you can check your spam/junk mail folders as well.
9. Enter the activation code in the box displayed in the application and proceed.
10.Select the accounts listed and hit Submit to add accounts.
249. How can I access Mvelopes Personal on my iPhone?
Mvelopes Personal can be accessed through iPhone at m.mvelopes.com. There is no separate
application for iPhones.
250. Adding account fails with error 102.
Please try adding the accounts again. The reason is that this status code, 102 can be caused
by a communication interruption between our server and the financial institutions
server. Many times this type of issue will resolve itself simply by waiting about 4 hours and
trying to add the account(s) again. If that didn't help, please contact Customer Support
through Live Chat or leave a message through "Ask a Question" by selecting the Support
icon.
Alternatively, you can try and login to the financial institution's website. If you are able to
login and do not see any notification of site maintainence then please contact Customer
Support through Live Chat or leave a message through "Ask a Question" by selecting the
Support icon.
251. How to handle ATM/Cash withdrawal?
There are two ways to handle cash withdrawals.
1) Split the cash withdrawal based on how the funds have been or will be spent. To reflect
cash on hand within the budget, split any remainder to the Offline Cash Account.
2) Process the cash withdrawal as an account to account transfer by dragging the transaction
to the account from where the money came from and select the Offline Cash Account in the
"To" field. We would then need to create manual transactions to reflect the cash spent.
252. About Finicity
Finicity is a leading Internet and mobile software services company specializing in the
development and delivery of financial productivity applications for personal and business
use. Headquartered in Draper, Utah and founded in 1999 In2M is a privately held company.
Finicity seeks to empower its customers with intuitive and automated technology products
that deliver real-time financial information in a meaningful context. In 2002 Finicity released
Mvelopes Personal, its first solution build upon its patented Mobile Application Platform. A
subsequent release in 2004 moved Mvelopes Personal to a completely web-based
application—the first online personal budget software of its kind. Mvelopes Personal has
quickly become one of the leading personal budgeting solutions available today. The latest
version, Mvelopes Personal 3.0, was honored by PC World with the prestigious 2006 World
Class Award and named one of "The 100 Best Products of Year" by the magazine's editors,
and named one of "The 4 Best Money Managers" by Success Magazine.
Building on that success, Finicity utilized the fundamental design and architecture of
Mvelopes Personal to create a small business solution that was released in beta in October
2006. Designed for the self-employed or small business owner with little or no accounting
staff, Mvelopes Business budget software allows small businesses to monitor and manage
their cash flow in real time, helping ensure profitability on each project or venture. Following
the beta testing, a full release is scheduled for the fall of 2007 targeting the 17 million small
businesses across the U.S. with a simple and easy-to-use solution to enable financial success.
Finicity actively searches for new ways to bring financial information and services to its
customers in an easily accessible and meaningful format to help them maximize their
financial success.
253. How do I access Mvelopes Personal using my Blackberry?
Mvelopes Personal can be accessed using your Blackberry. Simply enter the URL:
m.mvelopes.com
If there are time-out errors like 504 Gateway Time-out, please increase the timer settings to
prevent time out. If you are not sure how to do this, consult Blackberry's owner's manual. If
this doesn't help, please contact the service provider.
254. How do I assign a dividend?
Dividend earned for a savings account should be assigned directly to the Savings envelope. If
there isn't one, we can create it by selecting "New" in the Envelopes Pane. For interest
checking account, it should be assigned to the Income Cash Pool.
255. How to export transactions from the application to other
money-management software?
Transactions cannot be exported from the application to other money-management
software. It is, however, possible to generate reports/take back-ups of transactions
of accounts/envelopes and save them for historical/archival purpose. To do this, select
"Reports" at the top of the application. Select the report of your choice. Select Spreadhseet or
PDF under "Output Type" and save it.
256. What is an error 325?
An error 325 means that the account is currently being aggregated or updated by Finicity's
aggregation platform. In most cases, you will only see this error if you attempt to update an
account from the account manager while an update is already in process. Normally this issue
will go away on its own if you try to update the accounts at a later time. If it still persists,
contact Customer Support by selecting the Support icon, Live Chat or leave a message by
selecting "Ask a Question".
If you receive an error 325 while attempting to add an account that is not already being
aggregated, please contact us immediately for assistance.
257. How do I assign an overdraft charge?
When the amount of money withdrawn from a bank account is greater than the amount
actually available in the account, the excess is known as an overdraft, and the account is said
to be overdrawn. The transaction will download as a charge which needs to be assigned to a
separate ennvelope named appropriately like "Overdraft Fee". The envelope balance can be
zeroed out by transferring funds from Income Cash Pool or from other envelopes with excess
funds.
If you have your overdraft account added to the application, you will basically need to handle
this as an account to account transfer. Since the application is designed to not allow the use
of debt to fund a lifestyle, you will also need to take the additional step of an envelope to
envelope transfer. Please follow the steps below:
1. Assign the account to account transfer as normal. As with any other account to account
transfer, you will have two transactions come in - a payment out of the overdraft account and
a deposit into the checking account.
a.) assign both the deposits and withdrawal transactions to the 'account
transfers' envelope.
2. By assigning these transactions, your 'money for overdraft' envelope will go positive by the
amount of the transfer. You will then need to transfer that amount out of the 'money for
overdraft' envelope and into the Income Cash Pool (to fund it to multiple categories) or
directly to the envelope that best represents the category of the expense that originally made
you go into your overdraft protection.
a.) Example: I overspent by $50.00 in my grocery category, and this caused
me to go into my overdraft. My bank will transfer in increments of $100.00, so $100.00 was
transferred from my overdraft protection to my checking. I will assign the deposit into
checking and the withdrawal out of my overdraft account to the 'account transfers' envelope.
My 'money for overdraft' envelope will go up by $100.00 (so there will be a positive $100.00
in my money for overdraft envelope). I will then:
1.) Transfer $50.00 out of the 'money for overdraft' envelope into the grocery
envelope and leave the additional $50.00 in my money for envelope so that half of what I
owe to my overdraft is already set aside to help pay off my overdraft when I get paid again.
2. ) Transfer the full $100.00 out of the 'money for overdraft' envelope and place it in
the Income Cash Pool and fund $50.00 to my grocery envelope and fund the additional
$50.00 to the envelopes that I will be spending from before I get paid again.
-258.
Is PayPal supported?
PayPal is supported. The accounts are to be added like any other bank accounts.
To add an account,
1. Select "Add" under Spending Accounts.
2. Enter the financial institution name and hit Search.
3. Select the name and not the URL.
4. Enter the login credentials and hit Submit.
5. Select the accounts to be added and hit Submit.
6. Hit Submit.
259. Does Mvelopes Personal run on Linux?
Mvelopes Personal runs on Linux platform using Adobe/Macromedia's Flash 8.0 player and
above. Open source version of Adobe Flash is not supported.
260. What is error 3018?
Error 3018 means that we are unable to verify the account entered. Please check that the
account credentials are correct. Verify that the account has valid on-line access. If correct,
contact Customer Support by selecting the Support icon, Live Chat or leave a message under
"Ask a Question".
261. How to add Health Savings Account in Mvelopes Personal?
Health Savings Account (HSA) is supported by Mvelopes. It should be added as any normal
savings account, and a separate savings envelope needs to be created for it.
The purpose of the savings envelope is to reflect how much you are saving. We do not want
to think that our savings account money is money that we will be using to pay our bills on a
regular basis, and accidentally fund it into our spending envelopes. By creating an envelope
for the savings account, we can see that we have this money, and that it is accounted for,
while at the same time not considering it as part of what we are going to spend.
If funds were transferred from your Health Savings account to the Checking account, then
let's do an envelope transfer from the Savings envelope to the envelope that corresponds with
how the funds will be spent.
If we transferred to the Health Savings account, then we will want to fund or transfer to the
Savings envelope to match.
262. What does Error 42381: Source BFA is not confirmed 80900
mean?
This means your bill pay account is not yet confirmed. Confirming your account enables you
to use all the features of Bill Pay. Unconfirmed accounts have the following limitations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bill Pay sets a limit on the total amount of all bills you can pay from an unconfirmed
account.
Bill Pay also sets a limit (usually 45 days) on the total number of days you can make a
payment from an unconfirmed account.
You cannot set up automatic payments with an unconfirmed account.
You cannot transfer money to an unconfirmed account.
You cannot move payments to an unconfirmed account.
These limitations protect you in case someone attempts to use your account without
your authorization. When you confirm your account using information that only you
or someone you authorize to use your account can know, we re-evaluate your Bill Pay
account and remove most of the restrictions. The only limitation for a confirmed
account is the payment limit set by Bill Pay.
Account confirmation provides an extra level of assurance that the account you added
through Bill Pay is actually your account or an account that you are authorized to use.
Whenever you add an account to Bill Pay, we make two small deposits and one withdrawal in
the account. (The withdrawal is the sum of the two deposits.) The deposits and withdrawal
appear on your monthly account statement from your financial institution (either online or
mailed to you) with ACCTCONFRM or similar wording in the description. Find this
information on your statement and use it to confirm your account.
To confirm an account:
1) Login to Bill Pay
2) Click on the My Accounts tab and click the Unconfirmed link
3) Enter these amounts and click Confirm
263. What is error code 3016?
The 3016 means that the program was unable to login the bank's web site using the
credentials you provided. Please visit the financial institution's web site and try to login with
your credentials.
If you are able to login to the web site but are unable to add your account(s) to the program,
please contact Customer Support with the following information so that we may resolve the
issue.
1) Any error and or status code that you receive when you try to add your accounts.
2) The login URL for your banks website
3) The # of attempts as well as the date/time that you attempted to add the account(s)
4) The name of your financial institution.
264. My account(s) fail with error 169. Why?
This is an issue with duplicate accounts. There are two accounts that appear to the software
to be the same. Perform a single account refresh at a later time to verify that the error is
repeatable at alternate times of day. If the error is repeatable, verify that the status code
remains “169”. If it is, please contact Customer Support.
265. My account(s) fail with error 328. Why?
This means an unexpected exception occurred. Perform another single account refresh to
verify that the status code is repeatable at different times of day and confirm that the status
code remains the same. If the problem is repeatable, please contact Customer Support.
266. While scheduling payments in bill pay, I get "Error 44035
TRANSACTION WAS DENIED BY RISK
STRATEGY BYXBMFPA 60000". What does that mean?
This message will appear if the payment exceeds the amount the payee can receive. Please
attempt to schedule a smaller amount or try scheduling multiple smaller payments. Periodic
payments (daily, weekly, monthly etc) have upper limits that are not disclosed for security
purposes.
267. What is MTD?
MTD is an acronym for Month to Date. It specifies a range of values that includes all dates
from the first day of the month to today. So "Funded MTD" would mean the amount funded
from the first day of the month to today.
268. How to clear cache and cookies for Mozilla Firefox?
Sometimes, clearing your cache and cookies can correct several issues. Below are the
instructions to clear your cache and cookies.
If you are using Firefox:
1) Close the main application window. In the remaining Firefox window, click Tools,
Options.
2) Click on "Clear Private Data"
3) Check the check boxes for Cache and Cookies. Make sure all other checkboxes are not
selected.
4) Click on Clear Private Data Now
5) Close all open Firefox windows.
6) Open Firefox and try again
If you are using IE:
1) Close the main application window.
2) Click on Tools and then Internet Options.
3a) If using IE 7, click the Delete button from within Browsing History. Click Delete Files.
Click Delete Cookies.
3b) If using IE 6 or earlier, click Delete Files. Check the box next to Delete All Offline
Content and click OK. Next, click Delete Cookies.
In Safari:
Click Safari, Empty Cache.
269. How do I enter a creditor?
You can add a creditor as you would add any other account. Depending on the type of
creditor, you can add the account you have with the creditor as a net worth only account (i.e.
Loans), or as an actual spending account (i.e. Credit Cards). You will be able to select
whether you would like to show the creditor as a spending account or a net worth only
account from a drop down menu.
Please reference the 'adding an offline (or online) account' articles for information on adding
a creditor account (key words add account).
If you need assistance in adding a creditor to Bill Pay, please reference the 'Bill Pay - Add a
Bill' articles (key words add a bill).
If you need further assistance, please click on the 'chat with support' icon in the upper right
hand corner of the support portal window.
270. Why is the application stalling/locking, or freezing?
There are several reasons why the application would stall and/or freeze.
1. The computer you are using does not meet our full system requirements.
2. Your internet connection is not as fast as is needed.
3. There is a large amount of data in your account. You have the ability to change your
display period to show the last 30 days to reduce the amount of data that the application has
to bring up for you when you first log in.
4. You may have other applications that are running and using many or most of your system
resources.
5. We are experiencing technical difficulties with our server.
6. In the instance of an application freeze, you may have a problem with your hardware
driver. The application should not, for any reason, make your entire computer 'lock up' or
'freeze'.
271. How can I speak to a live person?
Live chat (text chatting) is available 24 hours a day, 5 days a week. Hours of operation are
from 8pm MST on Sunday through 8pm MST on Friday. This knowledgebase also offers
hundreds of answers to many questions, simply earch by a key word. (For example, if you
need to learn about funding your envelopes, you can search with the key word 'fund')
To interact with a live agent, please click on the 'Chat with support' button in the upper right
hand corner of this support window.
We do not offer on demand phone support with your subscription. We apologize for any
inconvenience this may cause.
272. Will Mvelopes work on a Mac?
Yes. Mvelopes is completely online and uses a platform that runs on the Adobe Flash Player
(which can be downloaded for free from adobe.com), so it runs seamlessly on most browsers
on either a Mac or a PC.
273. What are the minimum system requirements to use the
application?
Windows
Macintosh
450 MHz Intel Pentium II processor (or
equivalent) and later
500 MHz PowerPC G3 and later
512MB RAM (1GB RAM recommended)
512MB RAM (1GB RAM recommended)
Windows Supported Browsers
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x, Firefox 1.x, Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 4.7, Netscape 7.x and above,
CompuServe 7, AOL 9, Opera 7.11 and above
Macintosh Supported Browsers
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2, Firefox 1.x, Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 7.x and above, AOL for OS X, Opera
6, or Safari 1.x and above
Connection Speed
Mvelopes Personal requires an Internet connection with a minimum speed of 256 Kbps
(DSL). A broadband Internet connection is recommended (1Mbps).
Required Free Browser Plug-in
The Mvelopes Personal system runs on an all-new platform using Adobe/Macromedia's
Flash 10.0 player. This environment provides a rich user experience, an easy-to-understand
interface, and many advanced features. The Flash player is a free browser plugin and can be
downloaded at Adobe.com
274. What is error 34506 (unable to add e-bill)?
The error 34506 indicates that the E-bill that you are attempting to set up is already connected
to a different Bill Pay service or tool. You will want to contact the payee (biller) that you are
trying to set up the e-bill for and find out where the other e-bill is set up and cancel that e-bill
before you will be able to set up the e-bill through Mvelopes Bill Pay.
275. What is the Bill Pay on time payment guarantee?
Payment Guarantee
FiServ will reimburse you up to $50 per payment for any late payment fees or penalties
you are charged as a result of the Payee/Biller not receiving a payment by the due date if all
the following apply:
If you scheduled the payment to be sent on a scheduled payment date with sufficient
lead time in advance of the payment due date, in accordance with the terms and conditions of
the service.
If correct information was provided to us about the payee/biller (name, address,
account number and amount).
If your account had sufficient funds to complete the payment on the scheduled payment
date.
If the payee/biller was a business.
If the payee/biller assessed late payment fees or penalties due to the delay of this
payment.
If you did not receive notice from us, our service provider, or the payee at least 10 days
prior to your scheduled payment that would have alerted you to a problem processing
payments from our Service.
Please notify us via live chat if one of your vendors has reported that a payment has not
been received.
Pleae note that the Payment Guarantee does not apply if you attempted to pay a company for
which you have an account number and an account number was not provided for the
payment.
276. What is the Debt-Roll Down principle?
The idea behind the debt roll-down principle is to set aside a certain amount for debt
repayment, then continue to maintain the total monthly amount you pay in debt reduction
even after the first debt is paid off. Simply apply the amount you were paying on the first
debt to the next debt on the list. When that debt too is paid off,you apply the amount you had
been paying on one and two to the third, and so on. The key to impliment this concept is to
make sure you continue paying the same aggregate amount every month until every debt is
paid.
Apply this technique to the envelope spending system. You have already set up an envelope
spending account for each of your debt obligations. The amount of funding you are applying
each month is equal to the payment you make for each debt. As soon as you pay off the first
debt, transfer the funding goal for that envelope to the next highest priority debt envelope.
When that one too is paid off, transfer the combined funding to the next highest priority debt
envelope, and so on until you have eliminated all of your debt—including your mortgage.
277. The Spending Plan displays a yellow triangle with an
exclamation mark. What does that mean?
A yellow triangle with an exclamation mark is displayed below those months for which the
sum of incomes do not match the sum of funds alloted to the envelopes. At the bottom of the
Spending Plan - 12 month View page, "Total Incomes" and "Total Envelopes" are listed.
A negative difference indicates the sum of funds distributed among the envelopes is more
than that of the incomes; a positive difference indicates the sum of funds distributed among
the envelopes is less than that of the incomes. Please make the necessary adjustments so that
the difference is zero. Click Save and the symbol will no longer be displayed.
278. Is Finicity registered with the BBB?
Finicity has been a BBB acredited business since 2003. We have taken special effort to meet
the highest BBB standards for the security and comfort of our customers.
We currently have an A+ rating with the BBB. This is the highest grade that a business can
be given.
For more information on what being a BBB Accredited business means, and to see our most
up to date BBB grade and information, you can visit our BBB Rating page here:
http://utah.app.bbb.org/ratingreport/4002492
279. Why am I not getting a response from the chat representative?
If you are responding to an agent and they are not responding back, it is most likely that the
agent is not seeing your responses due to a browser issue. Pleae try clearing your cache and
cookies, and then attempt to chat with a representative again. This will correct the issue.
If you are using Firefox, try this:
1) Close the main application window. In the remaining Firefox window, click Tools,
Options.
2) Click on "Clear Private Data"
3) Check the check boxes for Cache and Cookies. Make sure all other checkboxes are not
selected.
4) Click on Clear Private Data Now
5) Close all open Firefox windows.
6) Open Firefox and try again
If you are using IE, try this:
1) Close the main application window.
2) Click on Tools and then Internet Options.
3a) If using IE 7, click the Delete button from within Browsing History. Click Delete Files.
Click Delete Cookies.
3b) If using IE 6 or earlier, click Delete Files. Check the box next to Delete All Offline
Content and click OK. Next, click Delete Cookies.
280. Why do I get nothing awhen I click on 'chat with a live
representative'?
It is most likey that there is a pop up blocker stopping the chat window from coming up. It is
also possible that you need to change your firewall settings.
As a temporary fix to access chat on a Windows or Linux system, you will want to click on
the chat link while (at the same time) holding the 'Shift' key.
As a temporary fix to access chat on a Mac system, you will want to click on the chat link
while (at the same time) holding the 'Command' key.
281. My account(s) fail with error 525. What should I do?
We were unable to complete your request because the financial institution's web site is down
for maintenance or is otherwise unavailable. Try logging directly into your institution's
website. If you are unable to do so, please wait until access to their site has been restored. If
you are able to log in directly to the institutions website, please wait a minimum of 4 hours
and then attempt to add the account again. If you still receive the same error please contact
Customer Support for further assistance by selecting the Support icon.
282. Using the Envelope Sweep Feature
What does Sweep mean?
When you hear the word Sweep, you probably think of, or picture in your mind, a
broom. Just as you would sweep the kitchen floor with a broom when you are cleaning house,
the Sweep feature is a way to clean your envelopes. Of course, sweeping your envelopes is a
lot better than sweeping the kitchen floor. Instead of throwing away what you sweep up, you
actually get to reuse it however you choose. When you have excess funds that remain in more
than one envelope, you can sweep those funds up into a pile and fill in any negative envelope
balances or, better yet, apply the leftovers to a savings envelope. Plus, if you have consumer
debt, or any debt at all, apply the money you swept up to paying down that debt and get
closer to being debt free!
Why is Sweeping better than a regular Envelope Transfer?
If you have leftover money in only one envelope, then you'll likely just want to use the
envelope transfer feature. But if you have multiple envelopes with leftover funds, doing one
transfer at a time and repeating the process gets old fast. The Envelope Sweep window acts as
a "multiple transfer" or "batch transfer" between envelopes. One thing to note, however, it
that Sweeping is a many-to-one as well as a one-to-many model. It is not a batch process for
one-to-one envelope transfers.
How do I open the Envelope Sweep window?
To open the Envelope Sweep window, click on the "Sweep" link in the menu bar of the
Envelope pane.
How does Sweep work?
In the Sweep window, there are two columns where amounts are entered for every envelope
in the list--the "Sweep OUT" column and the "Sweep INTO" column. At the bottom of these
two columns is a "Sweep Envelope" drop-down list. This is the key to the entire Sweep
feature.
When you select an envelope as the "Sweep Envelope," that envelope becomes, if you
will, the "dust pan." But this is no ordinary dust pan. It doesn't just collect money, it can
distribute money as well. The "Sweep OUT" column will transfer money OUT of the
envelopes and INTO the "Sweep Envelope." And the "Sweep INTO" column does the exact
opposite. It will transfer money INTO the envelopes FROM the "Sweep Envelope." The
"Sweep Envelope" will become disabled within the list, when it's selected from the dropdown list, because you can't transfer money from an envelope to the exact same envelope.
It is not necessary to go to every envelope and enter amounts into the correct column. If you
are going to transfer the entire amount for an envelope, you can check the box for that
envelope in the "Entire Balance" column. The entire envelope balance will automatically be
placed in the correct column based on if it is positive or negative. Unchecking the box will
remove the amount from either columns, leaving them as $0.00. Now if you check the box
for an envelope but decide to change the amount, you can just type the desired amount in
either column and the box will be unchecked.
As you enter amounts for each envelope, you can see what the New Balance for your
envelopes will be on the far right. The totals for both the "Sweep OUT" and "Sweep INTO"
columns are also calculated and displayed at the bottom of the window. Obviously it is great
when the calculated difference is positive, but sometimes it could be negative. In this case,
the "Sweep Envelope" will be decreased by that amount.
When you are ready to complete the sweep, click the "Run" button and voilà, all of your
envelope transfers are done in one fell swoop! If you were to go into the Envelope Register
for each envelope that was a part of the sweep, you would see the envelope transfer
transactions that were created.
Example:
1. Lets say you have three envelopes that have leftover funds in them, and one envelope that
has a negative amount:
Auto:Fuel = $150.00
Clothing = $162.45
Food:Groceries = $19.90
His Spending = -$53.86
2. You open the Envelope Sweep window and you check the Entire Balance check boxes for
each of these four envelopes.
3. The amounts are placed in their corresponding columns and the New Balances, Sweep
Totals, and Difference are calculated:
New Balances:
Auto:Fuel = $0.00
Clothing = $0.00
Food:Groceries = $0.00
His Spending = $0.00
Totals:
Sweep OUT Total = $332.35
Sweep INTO Total = $53.86
Difference = $278.49
4. You change your mind and don't want to sweep out the entire balance for Auto:Fuel, so
you change the amount from $150.00 to $25.00, and the check box unchecks itself.
New Balances:
Auto:Fuel = $125.00
Clothing = $0.00
Food:Groceries = $0.00
His Spending = $0.00
Totals:
Sweep OUT Total = $207.35
Sweep INTO Total = $53.86
Difference = $153.49
5. You choose the Income Cash Pool as the Sweep Envelope and click the Run button.
6. The Envelope Transfers are created, the Sweep window closes, and your envelope balances
are updated.
7. You open the Income Cash Pool Envelope Register and see the following transfer
transactions:
Funding to His Spending
Envelope Transfer from Food:Groceries
Envelope Transfer from Auto:Fuel
Envelope Transfer from Clothing
Click on outlined images to enlarge
283. Where can I access CheckFree's terms of use?
Please note: This is an agreement for using the Bill Pay Service that is powered by
CheckFree. This agreement is presented to you at enrollment of the Bill Pay service. This
agreement is SEPARATE from the Mvelopes User Agreement and additional terms and
conditions may apply. CheckFree may also change this agreement at any time.
For your convenience, we have provided the text of this user agreement below:
Terms and Conditions
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE BILL DELIVERY AND PAYMENT SERVICE
The following link provides additional terms and conditions related to other services provided
through the CHECKFREE Universal Payment Network. Such additional terms and
conditions will apply only if you initiate action with the following services: Online Payments
View Online Payments Terms and ConditionsSERVICE DEFINITIONS
"Agreement" means these Terms and Conditions of the Bill Delivery and Payment Service.
"Bill Payment" is a payment that is initiated by you through the Service to a Payee. "Billing
Account" is the checking account from which all Service fees will be automatically debited.
"Business Day" is every Monday through Friday, excluding Federal Reserve holidays. "Due
Date" is the date reflected on your Payee statement for which the Bill Payment is due; it is
not the late date or grace period. "Payee" is the entity to which you wish a payment to be
directed through the Service. "Payment Account" is the checking account or credit card
account from which payments will be debited. "Payment Instruction" is the information
provided by you to the Service for a payment to be made to the Payee (such as, but not
limited to, Payee name, Payee account number, and Scheduled Payment Date). "Scheduled
Payment" is a Bill Payment that has been scheduled through the Service but has not begun
processing. "Scheduled Payment Date" is the day you want your Payee to receive your Bill
Payment and is also the day your Payment Account will be debited (except for credit card
payments, which are charged to your Payment Account two (2) Business Days prior to the
Scheduled Payment Date); if the Scheduled Payment Date falls on a non-Business Day, the
Scheduled Payment Date will be considered to be the previous Business Day. "Service"
means the Bill Delivery and Payment Service offered by or through CHECKFREE
CORPORATION and its subsidiaries ("CHECKFREE"). "We," "us," and "our" refer to the
Service. "You" and "your" refer to the individual that is accepting the payment service from
the Service. An "Authorized User" is any individual which you allow to use the Service or
your password or other means to access your account.
BILL PAYMENT SCHEDULING
Bill Payments begin processing two (2) Business Days prior to your Scheduled Payment
Date. Therefore, the application will not permit you to select a Scheduled Payment Date less
than two (2) Business Days from the current date. When scheduling Bill Payments, you must
select a Scheduled Payment Date that is no later than the actual Due Date reflected on your
Payee statement unless the Due Date falls on a non-Business Day; if the actual Due Date falls
on a non-Business Day, you must select a Scheduled Payment Date that is at least one (1)
Business Day before the actual Due Date. Scheduled Payment Dates should be prior to any
late date or grace period. In certain rare situations, a Bill Payment may take four (4) Business
Days to be processed, in which case the Service will notify you within the application.
SERVICE GUARANTEE
Due to circumstances beyond the control of the Service, particularly delays in handling and
posting Bill Payments by the Payee or financial institutions, some Bill Payment transactions
may take longer to be credited to your account. The Service will bear responsibility for any
late payment related charges up to $50.00 should a Bill Payment post after its Due Date as
long as the Bill Payment was scheduled in accordance with the guidelines described under
"Bill Payment Scheduling" in this Agreement.
PAYMENT AUTHORIZATION AND PAYMENT REMITTANCE
By providing the Service with account information of the Payee to which you wish to direct
payments, you authorize the Service to follow the Payment Instructions that it receives
through the payment system. In order to process payments more efficiently and effectively,
the Service may edit or alter payment data or data formats in accordance with Payee
directives. For Bill Payments only, if you choose to utilize a Payment Account that is a credit
card account, you understand and acknowledge that the Service does not perform any identity
verification on such credit card accounts. When the Service receives a Payment Instruction,
you authorize the Service to debit your Payment Account and remit funds on your behalf so
that the funds arrive as close as reasonably possible to the Scheduled Payment Date
designated by you. You certify that any Payment Account you add to your profile is an
account from which you are authorized to make payments, and any payment you make using
the Service will debit/charge a Payment Account that you are legally authorized to use. You
also authorize the Service to credit your Payment Account for payments returned to the
Service by the United States Postal Service or Payee, or payments remitted to you on behalf
of another user of the Service. The Service will use its best efforts to make all your payments
properly. However, the Service shall incur no liability and any Service Guarantee shall be
void if the Service is unable to complete any payments initiated by you because of the
existence of any one or more of the following circumstances:
1. If, through no fault of the Service, your Payment Account does not contain sufficient funds
to complete the transaction or the transaction would exceed the credit limit of your
overdraft account;
2. The payment processing center is not working properly and you know or have been advised
by the Service about the malfunction before you execute the transaction;
3. If, through no fault of the Service, a Payee that makes available to you split-payment
functionality (in which your payment may be split and allocated in various ways that such
Payee may offer) does not split and/or allocate the payment in accordance with your
Payment Instruction;
4. You have not provided the Service with the correct Payment Account information, or the
correct name, address, phone number, or account information for the Payee; and/or,
5. Circumstances beyond control of the Service (such as, but not limited to, fire, flood, or
interference from an outside force) prevent the proper execution of the transaction and the
Service has taken reasonable precautions to avoid those circumstances.
Provided none of the foregoing exceptions are applicable, if the Service causes an incorrect
amount of funds to be removed from your Payment Account or causes funds from your
Payment Account to be directed to a payee which does not comply with your Payment
Instructions, the Service shall be responsible for returning the improperly transferred funds to
your Payment Account, and for directing to the proper Payee any previously misdirected
transactions, and, if applicable, for any late payment related charges.
PAYMENT METHODS
The Service reserves the right to select the method in which to remit funds on your behalf to
your Payee. These payment methods include, but are not limited to, an electronic payment, an
electronic to check payment, or a laser draft payment.
PAYMENT CANCELLATION REQUESTS
For Bill Payments only, if a Scheduled Payment is one you scheduled using a Payment
Account that is a checking account, you may cancel or edit such Scheduled Payment by
following the directions within the application. For Bill Payments only, if a Scheduled
Payment is one you scheduled using a Payment Account that is a credit card account, you
cannot cancel or edit such Scheduled Payment within the application; in such case, you must
contact your credit card company directly. There is no charge for canceling or editing a
Scheduled Payment that you scheduled using a Payment Account that is a checking account.
Once the Service has begun processing any Bill Payment, it cannot be cancelled or edited,
therefore a stop payment request must be submitted.
STOP PAYMENT REQUESTS
The Service cannot assist with a stop payment request for any Bill Payment scheduled using a
Payment Account that is a credit card account; in such case, you must contact your credit
card company directly. The following applies only to Bill Payments scheduled using a
Payment Account that is a checking account: The Service's ability to process a stop payment
request will depend on the Bill Payment method and whether or not a Bill Payment has
cleared. The Service may also not have a reasonable opportunity to act on any stop payment
request after a Bill Payment has been processed. If you desire to stop any Bill Payment that
has already been processed, you must contact customer service. Although the Service will
make every effort to accommodate your request, the Service will have no liability for failing
to do so. The Service may also require you to present your request in writing within fourteen
(14) days. The charge for each stop payment request will be the current charge for such
service as set out in the applicable fee schedule.
BILL DELIVERY AND PRESENTMENT
This feature is for the presentment of electronic bills only and it is your sole responsibility to
contact your Payee directly if you do not receive your Payee statement.
Information provided to the Payee - The Service is unable to update or change your personal
information, such as, but not limited to, name, address, phone number(s) and e-mail
address(es), that you have established with the electronic Payee. Any changes to such
information will need to be made by contacting the Payee directly. Additionally, it is your
responsibility to maintain all user names and passwords for the electronic Payee site. You
also agree not to use someone else's information to gain unauthorized access to another
person's bill. The Service may, at the request of the Payee, provide to the Payee your e-mail
address, service address, or other data specifically requested by the Payee at the time of
activating the electronic bill for that Payee, for purposes of the Payee informing you about
Service and/or bill information.
Activation - Upon activation of the electronic bill feature, the Service may notify the Payee of
your request to receive electronic billing information. The presentment of your first electronic
bill may vary and may take up to sixty (60) days, depending on the billing cycle of the Payee.
Additionally, the ability to receive a paper copy of your statement(s) is at the sole discretion
of the Payee. While your electronic bill feature is being activated, it is your responsibility to
keep your accounts current. The electronic Payee reserves the right to accept or deny your
request to receive electronic bills. In some instances, if you have made a payment to a Payee
through a CHECKFREE service, the Payee may elect to send your statement(s) to you
electronically.
Authorization to obtain bill data - Your activation of the electronic bill feature for a Payee
shall be deemed by us to be your authorization for us to obtain bill data from the Payee on
your behalf. For some Payees, you will be asked to provide us with your user name and
password for that Payee. By providing us with such information, you authorize us to use the
information to obtain your bill data.
Notification - The Service will use its best efforts to present all of your electronic bills
promptly. In addition to notification within the Service, the Service may send an e-mail
notification to the e-mail address listed for your account. It is your sole responsibility to
ensure that this information is accurate. In the event you do not receive notification, it is your
responsibility to periodically log on to the Service and check on the delivery of new
electronic bills. You are responsible for ensuring timely payment of all bills.
Cancellation of electronic bill notification - The electronic Payee reserves the right to cancel
the presentment of electronic bills at any time. You may cancel electronic bill presentment at
any time. The timeframe for cancellation of your electronic bill presentment may vary and
may take up to sixty (60) days, depending on the billing cycle of the Payee. The Service will
notify your electronic Payee as to the change in status of your account, and it is your sole
responsibility to make arrangements for an alternative form of bill delivery. The Service will
not be responsible for presenting any electronic bills that are already in process at the time of
cancellation.
Non-Delivery of electronic bill(s) - You agree to hold the Service harmless should the Payee
fail to deliver your statement(s). You are responsible for ensuring timely payment of all bills.
Copies of previously delivered bills must be requested from the Payee directly.
Accuracy and dispute of electronic bill - The Service is not responsible for the accuracy of
your electronic bill(s). The Service is only responsible for presenting the information we
receive from the Payee. Any discrepancies or disputes regarding the accuracy of your
electronic bill summary or detail must be addressed with the Payee directly.This Agreement
does not alter your liability or obligations that currently exist between you and your Payee.
PROFILE INFORMATION
Information included in your Service profile, as identified in the application, including, but
not limited to, your user name, password, and Payment Account data, is used as part of the
Service with participating billers that offer their own biller direct sites through
CHECKFREE. You will be able to use your same profile data (such as user name and
password) to sign-in to such participating biller direct sites. Your Payment Account
information will also be available to make payments to such participating billers.
EXCLUSIONS OF WARRANTIES
THE SERVICE AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
PASSWORD AND SECURITY
You agree not to give or make available your password or other means to access your account
to any unauthorized individuals. You are responsible for all payments you authorize using the
Service. If you permit Authorized Users or other persons to use the Service or your password
or other means to access your account, you are responsible for any transactions they
authorize. If you believe that your password or other means to access your account has been
lost or stolen or that someone may attempt to use the Service without your consent or has
transferred money without your permission, you must notify the Service at once by calling 1800-564-9184 during customer service hours.
YOUR LIABILITY FOR UNAUTHORIZED TRANSFERS
If you tell us within four (4) Business Days after you discover your password or other means
to access your account has been lost or stolen, your liability is no more than $50.00 should
someone access your Service account without your permission. If you do not tell us within
four (4) Business Days after you learn of such loss or theft, and we can prove that we could
have prevented the unauthorized use of your password or other means to access your Service
account if you had told us, you could be liable for as much as $500.00. If your monthly
financial institution statement contains transfers through the Service that you did not
authorize, you must tell us at once. If you do not tell us within ninety (90) days after the
statement was sent to you, you may lose any amount transferred through the Service without
your authorization after the ninety (90) days if we can prove that we could have stopped
someone from taking the money had you told us in time. If a good reason (such as a long trip
or a hospital stay) prevented you from telling us, we may extend the period.
ERRORS AND QUESTIONS
In case of errors or questions about your Service transactions, you should as soon as possible
notify us via one of the following:
•
•
Telephone us at 1-800-564-9184 during customer service hours;
Write us at:
CHECKFREE CORPORATION
P.O. Box 2168
Columbus, OH 43216-2168
If you think your financial institution statement is incorrect or you need more information
about a Service transaction listed on the statement, we must hear from you no later than
ninety (90) days after the FIRST statement was sent to you on which the problem or error
appears. You must:
1. Tell us your name and Service account number;
2. Describe the error or the transaction in question, and explain as clearly as possible why you
believe it is an error or why you need more information; and,
3. Tell us the dollar amount of the suspected error.
If you tell us verbally, we may require that you send your complaint in writing within ten (10)
Business Days after your verbal notification. We will tell you the results of our investigation
within ten (10) Business Days after we hear from you, and will correct any error promptly.
However, if we require more time to confirm the nature of your complaint or question, we
reserve the right to take up to forty-five (45) days to complete our investigation. If we decide
to do this, we will provisionally credit your Payment Account within ten (10) Business Days
for the amount you think is in error. If we ask you to submit your complaint or question in
writing and we do not receive it within ten (10) Business Days, we may not provisionally
credit your Payment Account. If it is determined there was no error we will mail you a
written explanation within three (3) Business Days after completion of our investigation. You
may ask for copies of documents used in our investigation. The Service may revoke any
provisional credit provided to you if we find an error did not occur.
PRIVACY POLICY
The Service's policy with respect to use of your information will be in accordance with the
CHECKFREE privacy statement that may be viewed at the www.MyCheckFree.com site.
SERVICE FEES AND ADDITIONAL CHARGES
Any financial fees associated with your standard deposit accounts will continue to apply. You
are responsible for any and all telephone access fees and/or Internet service fees that may be
assessed by your telephone and/or Internet service provider. When applicable, you agree to
pay any other applicable charges and authorize the Service to deduct such charges from your
designated Billing Account.
FAILED OR RETURNED TRANSACTIONS
In using the Service, you are requesting the Service to make payments for you from your
Payment Account. If we are unable to complete the transaction for any reason associated with
your Payment Account (for example, there are insufficient funds in your Payment Account to
cover the transaction), the transaction may not be completed. In some instances, you will
receive a return notice from the Service. In each such case, you agree that:
1. You will reimburse the Service immediately upon demand the transaction amount that has
been returned to the Service;
2. For any amount not reimbursed to the Service within fifteen (15) days of the initial
notification, a late charge equal to 1.5% monthly interest or the legal maximum, whichever
rate is lower, for any unpaid amounts may be imposed;
3. You will be assessed a $20.00 fee by the Service if the transaction is returned because you
have insufficient funds in your Payment Account to cover the requested payment. You
hereby authorize the Service to deduct this amount from your designated Billing Account by
ACH debit. In addition, you may be assessed a fee by your financial institution as a result of
the return that is separate from and in addition to any fee assessed by the Service;
4. You will reimburse the Service for any fees or costs it incurs in attempting to collect the
amount of the return from you; and,
5. The Service is authorized to report the facts concerning the return to any credit reporting
agency.
ALTERATIONS AND AMENDMENTS
This Agreement, applicable fees and service charges may be altered or amended by the
Service from time to time. In such event, the Service shall provide notice to you. Any use of
the Service after the Service provides you a notice of change will constitute your agreement
to such change(s). Further, the Service may, from time to time, revise or update the
applications, services, and/or related material, which may render all such prior versions
obsolete. Consequently, the Service reserves the right to terminate this Agreement as to all
such prior versions of the applications, services, and/or related material and limit access to
only the Service's more recent revisions and updates. You authorize us to send or provide by
electronic communication any notice, communication, amendment or replacement to the
Agreement, or disclosure required to be provided orally or in writing to you. You agree to
receive any electronic communication provided to you and will not attempt to avoid receiving
any such communication. You are deemed to have received any electronic communication
provided to you when they are made available to you.
ADDRESS OR BANKING CHANGES
It is your sole responsibility to ensure that the contact information in your user profile is
current and accurate. This includes, but is not limited to, name, address, phone number(s) and
e-mail address(es). Changes can be made either within the application or by contacting
customer service. Any changes in your Payment Account should also be made in accordance
with the procedures outlined within the application's Help files. All changes made are
effective immediately for scheduled and future payments paid from the updated Payment
Account information. The Service is not responsible for any payment processing errors or
fees incurred if you do not provide accurate Payment Account or contact information.
SERVICE TERMINATION, CANCELLATION, OR SUSPENSION
In the event you wish to cancel the Service you may do so via one of the following:
1. Telephone us at 1-800-564-9184 during customer service hours;
2. Write us at:
CHECKFREE CORPORATION
P.O. Box 2168
Columbus, OH 43216-2168
3. By using the application's cancellation feature.
Any payment(s) the Service has already processed before the requested cancellation date will
be completed by the Service. All Scheduled Payments will not be processed once the Service
is cancelled. The Service may terminate or suspend Service to you at any time. Neither
termination nor suspension shall affect your liability or obligations under this Agreement.
RETURNED PAYMENTS
In using the Service, you understand that the Service and/or the United States Postal Service
may return payments for various reasons, such as, but not limited to, the Service account
number is not valid; the Service is unable to locate account; or Payee account is paid in full.
The Service will use its best efforts to research and correct the returned payment, or void the
payment and credit your Payment Account. You may receive notification from the Service.
INFORMATION AUTHORIZATION
You agree that the information you provide to the Service can go through a verification
process. You agree that the Service reserves the right to obtain financial information
regarding your Payment Account from your financial institution (for example, to resolve
payment posting problems or for verification). In addition, you agree that the Service reserves
the right to request a review of your credit rating at its own expense through an authorized
bureau.
DISPUTES
In the event of a dispute regarding the Service, you and the Service agree to resolve the
dispute by looking to this Agreement. If you dispute a Bill Payment made from a Payment
Account that is a credit card account, you acknowledge that such dispute (including, but not
limited to, chargeback or fraud) must be taken up with your credit card company; the Service
is not responsible for any research or resolution of such credit card payment disputes. You
agree that this Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between
you and the Service which supersedes any proposal or prior agreement, oral or written, and
any other communications between you and the Service relating to the subject matter of this
Agreement. If there is a conflict between what an employee of the Service or customer
service department says and the terms of this Agreement, the terms of this Agreement will
prevail.
ASSIGNMENT
You may not assign this Agreement to any other party. The Service may assign this
Agreement to any future, directly or indirectly, affiliated company. The Service may also
assign or delegate certain of its rights and responsibilities under this Agreement to
independent contractors or other third parties.
NO WAIVER
The Service shall not be deemed to have waived any of its rights or remedies hereunder
unless such waiver is in writing and signed by the Service. No delay or omission on the part
of the Service in exercising any rights or remedies shall operate as a waiver of such rights or
remedies or any other rights or remedies. A waiver on any one occasion shall not be
construed as a bar or waiver of any rights or remedies on future occasions.
CAPTIONS
The captions of sections hereof are for convenience only and shall not control or affect the
meaning or construction of any of the provisions of this Agreement.
GOVERNING LAW
This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State
of Georgia, without regard to its conflicts of laws provisions.
THE FOREGOING SHALL CONSTITUTE THE SERVICE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND
YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SERVICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS (EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY THEREOF) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE INSTALLATION,
USE, OR MAINTENANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND/OR THE
SERVICE.I HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THE FOREGOING AGREEMENT AND
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL ITS TERMS.
284. What is the difference between 'clear' and 'delete' in the
pending transactions section, and when do I use them?
The difference beteween clearing a transaction and deleting a pending transaction is that if
you clear it, it is simply moved out of the pending transactions section, and is able to be
reconciled in the account register. If it is deleted, it is taken completely out of the application
as if the transaction had never happened or been created.
You will want to use the 'clear' option if a matching transaction is not downloaded into
the New Transactions Area (you will also want to chat with support or tell them through 'ask
a question' so that we can correct the issue if possible).
You will use the delete option if the transactions does not occur for some reason.
If you make a mistake on the payee name, the date, the amount, or the envelope you assign it
to, you can change these by clicking on the pending transaction and then selecting 'edit' or by
double clicking on the transaction. You do not need to delete it and re-create it.
285. How do I handle my 'Keep the Change' or "Way to Save"
transactions?
You will need to handle these transactions as account to account transfers since the money is
in fact being transferred from your checking acocunt to a savings account.
1. Assign the deposit (to savings) and the withdrawal (from checking) transactions to the
'account transfers' envelope.
2. Transfer the amount of the account to account transfer (from the Income Cash Pool or
another envelope) into the envelope that reflects your keep the change savings account to
keep the balance of that envelope the same as the balance of your spending account.
Note: Since these amounts are often small, it may be easier to add all of the deposits together
before you assign the account to account transfer transactions (write the sum down on paper
so you do not forget it), and then transfer a lump sum from your Income Cash Pool or other
envelope (so, instead of transfering $0.50 and $0.50 you can add them together and transfer a
full dollar).
286. When I try to set up accounts, it fails with error 1. What
should I do?
To get this issue fixed, please contact Customer Support by selecting Support icon. You can
either leave an offline message under "Ask a Question" or contact Support through "Live
Chat".
287. What is error 3?
This means there is a connectivity problem between Mvelopes and the financial institution's
server. Please try refreshing/authenticating your account(s) after 15-20 minutes. If the
problem persists, contact Customer Support by selecting "Support" icon.
288. Account(s) fails with error 102.
Please try updating the accounts again. The reason is that this status code, 102 can be caused
by a communication interruption between our server and the financial institutions
server. Many times this type of issue will resolve itself simply by waiting about 4 hours and
trying to update the account(s) again. If that didn't help, please contact Customer Support
through Live Chat or leave a message through "Ask a Question" by selecting the Support
icon.
Alternatively, you can try and login to the financial institution's website. If you are able to
login and do not see any notification of site maintainence then please contact Customer
Support through Live Chat or leave a message through "Ask a Question" by selecting the
Support icon.
289. I have been charged $1 or so in my trial. Why?
In order to make sure a credit card is being entered accurately, we run a test charge for this
amount. We don't settle or collect the funds, however. Most banks don't show these
transactions since they are so small and are not actually collected. It is more like a "test run"
to verify the card. It looks like your financial institution is one that does show this type of
transaction. When you check your statement later on, you will find that the transaction has
disappeared. That's because we have not actually collected the funds. This is a standard
operating procedure for many merchant accounts.
290. How to change the account I pay most of my bills from?
To change your preferred account, simply select another account in the Pay From list in the
Pay Bills section. When you choose a different account, the Make Preferred Account check
box appears so that you can select it for the new account.
Please note that changing the Preferred Account does not change the Service Free Account
from which Bill Pay fees are charged to.
291. What is error 1015?
Error code 1015 means that the nickname (description) of the account you are trying to add
contains invalid characters. Characters such as & < > and ' need to be removed from the
account description. If these characters are in the nickname on the banks website, you may
need to edit the name of the account on the bank website before adding it to the program.
292. What is error 104?
Please try adding the accounts again. The reason is that this status code, 104 can be caused
by a communication interruption between our server and the financial institutions
server. Many times this type of issue will resolve itself simply by waiting about 4 hours and
trying to add the account(s) again.
If that didn't help, please contact Customer Support through Live Chat or leave a message
through "Ask a Question" by selecting the Support icon.
293. Hwo do I handle business expenses in the application?
The easiest way to handle business expenses is to create an envelope group for your business
and add your unique business expenses as the envelopes for that group. This will allow you to
track your business expenses and budget while keeping them separate from your personal
expenses and budget.
To create a new group, select the "New" option in the Envelopes toolbar in the upper left
section of the application. You will be presented with the Create/Edit Envelope window.
Below the "Envelope name" section is the "Group name" section, which will be a drop down
menu. Click on the drop down menu and then click on the "New" option at the bottom of the
drop down menu. Type in the group name (i.e. your business' name, the word business,
business expenses, etc.). Then click on "Save". This will create a new group. You can tell it is
a group and not an envelope because there will be a blue folder behind the yellow envelope
that has the name you chose on it.
You can now create envelopes to be part of that group. You will again want to select "New"
underneath the word "Envelopes" in the upper left area of the application. You will again be
presented with the "Create/Edit Envelope" window, but this time, you will type a name in the
"Envelope name" section. Many business owners have envelopes such as shipping, payroll,
income, marketing, materials, rewards, etc. Once you type the name of your envelope, you
will want to click on the "Group name" drop down menu. If you saved the group you created
for your business successfully, it will be listed, adn you simply select it.
You will then want to choose if the expense is monthly or periodic (every single month or
once every three months, once a year, etc.), if it is required (it must be paid) or discretionary
(it is more of a flexible expense), and if you would like that envelope sweep enabled (Please
see the article on sweeping envelopes). Then you will want to click on "Save" at the bottom
of the create/edit envelope window. The envelope should appear underneath the group name.
If it does not, make sure that the group is expanded (click on the small gray arrow next to the
group name) so that it is pointing down. If it still is not there, try adding it again and be sure
to click on "Save".
You'll want to make sure that the total value of the business group is equal to the value of
your business account(s). This can be seen easily by contracting the business envelope group
(click on the gray arrow next to the group name so that it is pointing right). There will be a
total of the envelopes in that group by the group name.
If you would still like some more help, feel free to chat with support for more assitance. You
can reach a representative by clicking on "Live Chat" option in the top toolbar of this page.
294. Introducing the Debt Center
The
is a feature designed to help you get out of debt as quickly as possible. It
utilizes the Debt Roll-Down Plan, which is a method that will help you eliminate your debts,
one debt at a time. As one debt is paid in full, the planned payments for that debt will
automatically be reallocated (or rolled down) to the Extra Debt Payments envelope within
your Spending Plan, effectively accelerating the payoff of the next priority debt in your list.
Simply add all of your debts to the list and select a Payoff Order of either Lowest Balance,
Highest Interest Rate or your own Custom Priority. The debts in your list will reorder, giving
you a plan to eliminate from top to bottom. To help accelerate your Debt Roll-Down Plan
even more, we recommend that you make the minimum payments possible on all of your
debts and then apply as much extra money as possible to the Extra Debt Payments envelope,
which will prioritize your debt payments in the most efficient way possible.
To get started add a debt by clicking on Add, which is located in the upper right corner of the
Debt Center. In the pop up window, select the account you would like to add, enter the
interest rate, then click on the Add button.
Once you have all of your debts added in the Debt Center, you can see how effective the Debt
Roll-Down Plan can be. It can literally shave years off debt payments and save you thousands
of dollars in interest. You can also easily compare these numbers to your current payoff plan
to see how long it would take you to payoff all of your debts if you weren't using the Debt
Roll-Down method at all.
The "What If" Scenarios section will help you determine the impact extra payments can have
when applied toward your Debt Roll-Down Plan. You can enter a monthly value in Extra
Debt Payments field and the system will apply the amount to each of the three Payoff Orders
and show you how much interest and time could be saved. As you enter a value in the Extra
Debt Payments field, the Total Planned Payment field will adjust automatically and vise
versa.
If you'd like to see how an extra One-Time Payment would impact your debt situation, enter a
value in the One-Time Payment field. This amount will be applied to each of the three Payoff
Orders for the current month only, also showing you how much interest and time could be
saved by making just one extra payment.
Once you have decided on an "Extra Debt Payment" value you can afford, you simply need
to fund, transfer, or sweep the proper value into the "Extra Debt Payments" envelope and the
system will automatically apply the funds based on your chosen Payoff Order to the
envelopes associated with your debt accounts.
The Debt Roll-Down Plan has the following menu items:
•
•
•
•
•
Add: You can add debt(s) from a list of credit cards, line of credit accounts,
mortgages and loans added to the application and specify their interest rate. The
proper "Money For" envelope is automatically selected based on the credit card or
line of credit account chosen. For your mortgage and loans, you will have to select an
envelope from the drop down menu manually.
Edit: You can choose a different account, modify the interest rate and change the
custom priority using this option.
Remove: You can remove debt(s) one at a time using this option.
Spending Plan: You can define/change the Planned Payments for the corresponding
Money For and Extra Debt Payments envelopes (and the envelopes you have selected
for mortgages and loans) directly from your Spending Plan.
Help: You can search our Knowledgebase for detailed explanation on Debt Center
and other topics by selecting this option.
•
Payoff Order: Debts can be prioritized based on their balance, interest rate and even
your own Custom Priority. You may choose to pay off those debts with the Lowest
Balance as early as possible to get a quick win and see progress sooner, or pay off
those with the Highest Interest Rate to save the you the most amount of interest. Debt
payment priority can also be customized in case you have certain deadlines for
repayment that would take priority over Lowest Balance or Highest Interest Rate.
The Debt Roll-Down Plan has the following columns in the debt list:
•
Account: This is the name of the Debt Account. This is the same name displayed in
the Spending Accounts Register.
•
Envelope:This is the name of the envelope from which you make payments to the
listed Debt Account. All lines of credit and credit cards will automatically display
their respective "Money For" envelope in this field.
•
Starting Balance: This is the current register balance for when the selected Debt
Account is added in the debt center, not the balance of the account the day you added
it.
Current Balance: This is the current register balance for the selected Debt Account.
•
•
•
•
•
Interest Rate:This is the Interest Rate for the selected Debt Account
Planned Payment: This is the monthly spending and funding goal defined for debt
repayment envelopes in the Spending Plan. To change the value displayed in this
column simply edit the funding goal for the debt in your Spending Plan.
Payoff Month:This is the calculated month when your debt would be paid off in full.
This calculation includes the Roll-Down of planned payments as debts in the list are
eliminated.
Custom Priority:This is the priority that you can set to override the Lowest Balance
and Highest Interest Rate Payoff Orders if needed.
The Debt Roll-Down Plan has the following totals listed below the debt list:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extra Debt Payments Envelope: This is the Planned amount that you can set from
within the Spending Plan. This is also included as part of the Planned Payments total.
Starting Balance:This is the sum of the Starting Balances for all of the debts in the
list.
Current Balance:This is the sum of the Current Balances for all of the debts in the
list. You can compare this to the Starting Balance amount to see your overall progress
in paying off your debt completely.
Planned Payments:This is the sum of the Planned Payments that you make towards
the debts in the list for each month. This includes the amount that you have planned
for the Extra Debt Payments Envelope.
Payment Remaining:This is the total amount of money that you have left to pay on
all of your debts.
Interest Remaining:This is the total amount of interest that you will still have to pay
on all of your debts.
Time to Repay:This is how long it will take you to completely pay off all of your
debts in the list.
Debt Registers: This is an area in which you can edit the balances of your accounts
and see the transactions that have affected the balance of each account.
295. An example of a debt situation for the Debt Center
To demonstrate the power of using the Debt Center to apply the Debt-Roll Down Plan, let's
use the Ryan and Christine Richardson example from the Money for Life Book.
Description
Department Store
Balance
Payment
Interest
Rate
$435.00
$75.00
21.0%
Visa
$4350.00
$95.00
18.50%
American
Express
$4855.00
$75.00
14.50%
Auto Loan
$14750.00
$517.00
8.90%
Home Equity
Line
$9875.00
$142.00
8.50%
Student Loan
$3950.00
$142.00
7.50%
$206,320.00
$1422.00
7.00%
Mortgage
With no Debt Roll Down applied the Richardson's total debt obligations including interest
would be $510,175.97 and would take them 26 years and 11 months to repay.
With the Debt Roll Down strategy applied, the total payments the Richardson's need to make
to be debt free drops to $372,223.85 and time to re-pay the debt is reduced to 12 years and 7
months.
296. How do I add debt(s) to the Debt Center?
To add debt(s) to the Debt Center, click Add, which is located at the upper right hand corner
of the Debt Center.
Next, select the account you would like to add, enter the interest rate for that account, and
click Add.
Mortgages and Loans
When you add a loan to the debt center, you will need to select an envelope from the
'Envelope' drop down menu above (which will not be grayed out after a mortgage or loan
account is selected) that these payments will be assigned to.
Mortgages are a little bit different when you add them to the debt center. This is because you
will need to fill out some additional information for a mortgage. You will be asked what the
Principal & Interest is (this is usually the full amount due on your statement but can
sometimes be less if you have an escrow account) and the Payment from Statement (the full
amount due on your statement). You will also need to select an envelope that the payments
will be assigned to.
Assigning a mortgage transaction is handled differently than a regular transaction if your
mortgage is added to the debt center.
297. Editing debts in the Debt Center
To edit your debt(s) in the Debt Center, single click on the debt to highlight it then and click
on Edit option.
This will bring up the Edit Debt window where you can edit the type of account, modify the
interest rate, or your Custom Priority order. Once you're done editing the debt click Save.
You can only edit and save each debt one at a time.
298. How do I remove a debt from the Debt Center?
To remove your debt(s) from the Debt Center, highlight the debt by clicking it, then click
Remove.
You will then receive the following prompt: "Are you sure you want to remove your debt?" If
you want to remove the debt, click Yes, if you change your mind, click No.
299. Why is the Spending Plan option avaiable in the Debt Center?
Click on the Spending Plan option in the top toolbar of the Debt Center to access your
Spending Plan. It is here so that you can easily make changes to your planned 'Extra Debt
Payments' or other categories to help you eliminate your debt faster.
The Spending Plan is your map of how you intend to spend your money each month; it is
essentially your envelope funding goals. This should encompass monthly/periodic spending
requirements, debt reduction as well as savings and investments.
Modifying values in your Spending Plan, such as a Money For envelope or a loan envelope,
will update the Planned Payment field in the Debt Center for that particular debt.
300. What is the Payoff Order in the Debt Center?
The payoff order is a list of your debts in the order in which you want the debts to be paid off.
The payoff order can be prioritized based on the debts' balances and interest rates. You can
choose to pay off those debts with the highest interest rate first to save the most money on
interest, or the lowest balance first as early as possible to get the quick win. For example, if
two or more debts have the same priority, the one with the lowest balance should be paid off
first. If two or more debts have the same priority and balance (among those added in debt
center), the one with the highest interest rate is sorted as the highest priority. Debt payment
priority can also be customized.
301. Starting Balance in Debt Center
The Starting Balance is the current account balance when it was added in the Debt Center. It
may differ from the starting balance transaction you see in the Spending Accounts Register if
you added your debt to the Debt Center on a different date from which you added your credit
card, line of credit, loan, or mortgage account in the system.
302. Planned Payment in Debt Center
Planned Payment is the funding goal in the Spending Plan for each particular debt. Any
modification to the value for a Money For envelope or other debt envelope will also change
the Planned Payment value in the Debt Center. However, for Mortgages, the Planned
Payment will be the Principal & Interest only.
303. What is the Payoff Month in the Debt Center?
The Payoff Month is the forecasted month when your debt would be paid off in full. This
calculation includes the Roll-Down of planned payments as debts in the list are eliminated.
-304.
Custom Priority in the Debt Center
This is the priority that you can set to override the Lowest Balance and Highest Interest Rate
Payoff Orders if needed. To make changes to the Custom Priority for each debt, highlight a
debt then click on the Edit option. In the pop up window, edit the numerical value next to
Custom Priority.
Please note that changing the Custom Priority value for a single debt will not affect other
debts added, so it is possible for two or more debts to share the same Custom Priority. In this
situation, the application will prioritize the debt with the higher interest rate ahead of the
other debt with the same priority value. If you need to override this, simply edit all debts so
none of them share the same Custom Priority value.
Also note that the first debt you add to the debt center will have a default custom priority as
#1, the second debt you add will have a default of being #2 on the custom priority, the third
will be # 3, etc. Once you remove a debt, the debt that was next in line is given the highest
priority. For example, if I remove the debt with custom priority #1 because I paid it off, the
debt with the custom priority #2 is given the 1st priority, and the rest of my debts will
automatically change their custom priority accordingly. As stated above, you can change this
priority order if you desire at any time.
305. Can you explain how the totals displayed in the Debt Center's
Debt Roll-Down Plan Totals list are calculated?
The values displayed in the Debt Center's Debt Roll-Down Plan Totals list are defined as the
following:
Extra Debt Payments Envelope: This is the Planned amount that you can set from within
the Spending Plan. This is also included as part of the Planned Payments total.
Starting Balance: This is the sum of the Starting Balances for all of the debts in the list.
Current Balance: This is the sum of the Current Balances for all of the debts in the list. You
can compare this to the Starting Balance amount to see your overall progress in paying off
your debt completely.
Planned Payments: This is the sum of the Planned Payments that you make towards the
debts in the list for each month. This includes the amount that you have planned for the Extra
Debt Payments Envelope.
Payment Remaining: This is the total amount of money that you have left to pay on all of
your debts.
Interest Remaining: This is the total amount of interest that you will still have to pay on all
of your debts.
Time to Repay: This is how long it will take you to completely pay off all of your debts in
the list.
306. What is the Extra Debt Payments envelope?
When you add your debts to the list in the Debt Center, an "Extra Debt Payments" envelope
will automatically be created for you.
This special envelope will assist you in applying extra money to the envelopes you use to
make payments for your debt accounts. (This system generated envelope cannot be deleted,
as its functionality is very important) Acting like a conduit, any positive amounts that you
transfer, sweep, fund or assign to the Extra Debt Payments envelope will automatically be
transferred to the appropriate envelopes associated with your debt accounts based on your
priorities. The system will know which envelopes to apply the money to based on the payoff
order you chose when setting up your Debt Roll-Down Plan.
You should also try to allocate some of your income directly to the Extra Debt Payments
envelope within your Spending and Funding Plans. If you can find ways to spend less in
other areas as much as possible and apply that money to your Extra Debt Payments envelope,
you will be amazed at how much faster you will be able to eliminate your debt. Applying as
little as ten extra dollars a month to the Extra Debt Payments envelope can eliminate just over
1 year of the total time originally required to repay a debt with a balance of $2000.
307. What is the "What If" Scenarios field?
The "What If" Scenarios area is a great place to see how fast you can accelerate the payoff of
all your debt(s). "What If" you could find some extra money each month and apply it to your
Extra Debt Payments envelope? "What If" you applied a One-Time Payment such as a tax
return, annual bonus, or another type of extra income to debt repayment? You can see the
answers to these questions by adjusting the amounts of the Extra Debt Payments Envelope
and One-Time Payment fields in the Debt Center. You can even adjust the amount of the
Total Planned Payment field and it will calculate how much you need to allocate to your
Extra Debt Payments envelope each month to reach that goal.
Once you enter these amounts in the “What If” scenarios, you will be able to see how these
numbers will affect each different Payoff Order (the best option will be marked with a green
arrow). You can also easily compare these numbers to your current payoff plan to see how
long it would take you to payoff all of your debts if you weren't using the Debt Roll-Down
method at all.
308. What is the "2cents" icon for in the Debt Center?
The
icon is for making product related suggestions. To submit a suggestion, click on
the icon, which is located at the upper right hand corner of the Debt Center, and enter the
requested information in the required fields, then click the Submit button.
309. How can I balance my online account?
(This article assumes your online balance includes pending account activity, in the event
that the online balance does not include pending activity, our recommendation would be
to create the pending transactions to reflect activity that has not yet cleared the account
after assigning all transactions)
1. Make sure all New Transactions are assigned. The balances don't mean anything until all
of the transactions are assigned.
2. Check for Pending Transactions.
3. Go to the account itself (in the Mvelopes register and at your financial institutions
website).
3a - If there are no Pending Transactions, compare the Online and Register balance.
3b - If there are Pending Transactions, change the Period in Mvelopes to All Dates. Sort by
Clr. Compare the running balance on the same line of the last cleared transaction to the
Online Balance up above.
4 - If they differ, decide if you want to recreate any missing transactions and check for
duplicate transactions. The difference between the Online and Register Balance, or the Online
and Cleared Register Balance may consist of just one or two transactions. If there are
duplicate transactions, sort by Payment amount by clicking on the Payment column header
above. Delete any verifiable duplicates.
5 – Otherwise, you could adjust the Starting Balance entry by the difference between the
Online and Register Balance, or Online and Cleared Register Balance. Subtract the Register
Balance, or the Cleared Register Balance from the Online Balance. If the sum is positive, add
this amount to the Starting Balance. If the sum is negative, then subtract it from the Starting
Balance. This number is the number to enter as your new starting balance.
6 – Balance your envelopes. We do not want any negatives except for reimbursable expenses,
and we want each envelope to reflect what needs to be set aside out of the current funds at the
bank, from today going forward. This includes the Money For envelopes, which set aside
funds to pay to the credit card. If there is excess in any envelope, transfer it out. If there is not
enough, we will want to fund it after we've transferred out all the envelopes with extra funds.
So, start by transferring out the excess amounts to the Income Cash Pool, and then manually
fund the envelopes to make them reflect your current budget as of today.
310. What is aggregation?
Aggregation is the technical term for the process of downloading transactions.
We aggregate your financial institution accounts on a daily basis, usually between 2 and 6 am
MST. We will also sometimes manually aggregate the accounts to confirm that a reported
technical issue is fixed.
311. How do I reactivate my account?
You can reactivate your account by chatting with a representative. Unfortunately, if your
account has been inactive for more than 60 days, we will not be able to reinstate your
account, and you will need to open a new account (by signing up for a free trial) and creating
a new user name and password.
312. How do I schedule a bill to be paid in Bill Pay?
You will need to 'add a bill' before you can schedule a payment to that bill. Please see the
knowledgebase article "Bill Pay - Add a Bill" (see answer #223, you can use the key word
payee or add a bill to search by keyword).
To schedule a bill to be paid if the payee is already addded to Bill Pay, log into Bill Pay and
then:
1. Find the biller you wish to pay from your list of billers in the 'payment center' area of Bill
Pay.
2. Enter an amount in the 'Amount' field. This will automatically populate the first date
Fiserv (CheckFree) can guarantee the payment will reach the payee.
Another option is to select the date first and then enter the amount.
313. I get an error in Bill Pay stating that it is too early to pay the
biller, what does this mean, and what should I do?
If you are receiving this message in Bill Pay, it means that you are trying to select a date
earlier than when fiserv (CheckFree) can guarantee the payment will be received by the
payee.
There are three main methods of payment that fiserv (CheckFree) uses:
1. Laser Draft Check
This type of check is encoded with your account number and routing number, and is mailed
to the payee. This is the same as you writing a check out of your checkbook and mailing it.
The funds will not come out of your account until the payee actually cashes your check. (This
method can be as far out as 14 businesss days.)
2. Corporate Check (also known as 'electronic to check')
This payment methd consists of the money being withdrawn from your account and placed
into Fiserv's (CheckFree's) corporate account and the payee you requested receives a check
by mail from Fiserv (CheckFree).
3. Electronic Transfer
When this method is used, the funds are electronicallt drawn out of your account and
electronically deposited into the payee's account.
Unfortunately, it is not possible to choose which method is used, as the method used is
dependant upon what the payee accepts. However, as a general rule, if, when you select to
pay a bill, the date is more than a couple of days out, it is safe to assume a corporate check or
a laser draft check is being used.
The date you can select in Bill Pay is dependant upon which payment method(s) the payee
will accept. So, if you receive the erorr that the date you have selected is too early, this would
be why; you have simply chosen a date that fiserv cannot guarantee the payment will be
received, so the system will not allow you to select that date. (For more information on
fiserv's guarantee, please see the article titled "Fiserv (CheckFree) User agreement").
To correct this error message, simply select a later date.
If you are selecting a later date and are repeatedly getting this error, regardless of how much
later of a date you select, you can try logging out of the application, clearing your cache and
cookies, and logging back in.
If you are unsure of how to clear your cache and cookies, please see the article "clearing your
cache and cookies".
314. How do I schedule an automatic payment in Bill Pay?
To schedule an automatic bill payment in bill pay, first, make sure that the payee (biller) is
added to bill pay (if not, you can check the article "Bill Pay - Add a Bill").
1. Go to "Manage my bills"
2. Select the payee you wish to set up an automatic payment with.
3. Select "Add an automatic payment"
4. Select/fill out the appropriate information (the account to pay the bill from, the payment
amount, the payment frequency, etc.)
5. Click on "Save Changes"
This bill will be automatically paid based on the inforamtion you enter. If you wish to cancel
this automatic payment, go to "Manage my bills" and select the biller from the drop down
menu, and then select to "delete automatic payment 1". When prompted with the
confirmation (are you sure you want to delete this automatic payment?), select "Yes". The
number at the end of "delete automatic payment" may be differrent than the number 1,
depending on how many times you have canceled and re-created an automatic payment for
this biller, or if you have created a future automatic payment with a different amount or
schedule for this payee.
Be sure to check your pending payments in the payment center to cancel any pending
reoccuring payments, as the nearest scheduled automatic payment may not be canceled
without doing so manually.
315. Assigning a mortgage transaction when you have your
mortgage added to the debt center
After you've added your mortgage to the debt center, when you assign a mortgage
transaction, you will be prompted with a window that asks you how much of your payment
went to interest, principal, and if applicable, escrow or other services/fees and your extra debt
payment amount. (If you have not added your mortgage to the debt center, you would simply
assign the transaction to the mortgage envelope and the transaction would be complete and
assigned).
Based on the payment amount and interest rate entered in the debt center, the principal and
interest will automatically populate for you. For example, if I have a mortgage for
$206,320.00 that has an interest rate of 7.0% and a monthly payment of $1422.00, when I
assign this transaction to my mortgage envelope this window will appear with amounts prepopulated for me with $218.47 in principal, and $1203.53 to interest:
You can change these amounts as needed to reflect how much of your payment has gone to
escrow, home insurance, or some other service that you pay as part of your full mortgage
payment. This window will not allow you to have a difference between the 'total' and the
'transaction amount', ensuring that the calculations are as accurate as possible.
Also remember that in the debt center debt registers, your mortgage amount will only go
down by the principal amount.
316. How do I use the Debt Registers area in the Debt Center?
The main purpose of the Debt Registers is to allow you to see the transactions that are
affecting the account balance for the associated debt. The Debt Registers are where
transactions are shown for the loan and mortgage accounts that will update those balances,
since these account types will not show up under the Spending Accounts pane on the main
applicaiton screen.
When you assign a payment from your checking account to a loan or mortgage envelope, you
are prompted with a window that asks you to confirm how much of the payment was interest
and how much was principal. You will notice that after the transaction is assigned to the
envelope, within the corresponding loan/mortgage debt registers, the balance only goes down
by the principal amount, and the transaction in this register shows as just the principal amount
as well. This is to show you how much you still owe to your loan/mortgage in reality.
317. Assigning a loan transaction when your loan is added in the
debt center
Much like when you assign a mortgage transaction, when you assign a loan payment to the
envelope you have specified in the debt center, you will be prompted with a window that asks
you to confirm how much of your payment went to interest and how much went to principal.
The loan payment window will have fields that you can enter any fees or other services that
you pay with your loan in so that the debt center account register can update with just the
principal balance.
Based on the payment amount and interest rate entered into the debt center, the principal and
interest amounts will default to the correct calculations. For example, if I have an auto loan
that I pay on that has a full balance due of $14750.00 with a monthly payment of $517.00 and
an interest rate of 8.90% the amounts will calculate automatically for me, and the principal
field will show $410.26 and the interest field will show $106.74:
If I had some fees or other service come out of my loan payment, I can change them as
needed so that my principal amount is accurate.
Also remember that in the debt center debt registers, my loan amount will only go down by
the principal amount.
318. Debt Center - Loans/Mortgages FAQs
1) What is "Payment from Statement"?
The "Payment from Statement" is often described as the "Current Monthly Payment" on a
mortgage or loan statement. It is simply the full amount due on the loan or mortgage each
month.
2) Will "Payment from Statement" for a mortgage account always be greater than
"Principal & Interest"?
The minimum mortgage payment due for mortgages (unless it is an interest only mortgage not typical nor considered "permanent" financing) will always include principal and interest.
If you are managing your own property taxes and mortgage insurance the principal and
interest will be the full payment from statement. The payment from statement will be greater
than principal and interest alone when you are using an escrow provided in the mortgage
payment itself to manage property taxes and insurance.
The Debt Center asks for the Principal and Interest component of the payment and the entire
Payment amount from the statement so it can accurately calculate the principal to be applied
to the debt roll-down calculations.
3) Can payment transactions towards loan and mortgages be auto-assigned by the
Transaction Rules Manager?
Yes, they can be auto assigned as long as the description in the Payee field is unique enough.
The only difference is that you will not see the Debt Transaction window and the matching
Deposit transaction will automatically be created in the Debt Register for the corresponding
loan or mortgage.
4) When I assign the payment transaction to Mortgage loan, a "Debt Transaction"
window is displayed. What do I need to enter in the fields?
Most of the fields in the Debt Transaction windows will be automatically filled based on the
information in the Debt Center as well as the information that was entered when adding a
mortgage debt.
The amounts that are are the Principal & Interest and Payment From Statement. These values
are calculated based on the information provided at the time of adding the mortgage debt.
Then, the Interest field is initially calculated by taking the last Current Balance, multiplying
that by the interest rate, and then dividing by 12. If you find minor differences between the
values presented in the assigning a mortgage payment window and the values on your
statement, you can adjust them in this window.
The Principal field is initially calculated by subtracting the calculated Interest from the
Principal & Interest.
Escrow (taxes, insurance, etc.) is initially calculated by subtracting the Principal & Interest
from the Payment From Statement.
Fees / Other is never calculated nor auto-filled. The user may enter an amount in this field
and it will be calculated in the Total.
Extra Debt Payment is ONLY calculated and auto-filled when the Transaction amount is
greater than the Payment From Statement.
5) If I add an offline loan account in debt center, why can't I edit the account balance
from Account Manager?
Once an Offline loan or mortgage debt has been added to the Debt Center, you no longer edit
the account balance from the Account Manager. This is because when a Payment transaction
is assigned to the envelope associated with that offline loan or mortgage debt, deposit
transactions will be created against that account's Debt Register changing the account
balance. There will be no more need to manually update these offline loan or mortgage
balances. If you have budgeted for this expense within the Spending Plan, you will need to
assign the monthly payment transaction to the funded envelope for that loan or mortgage.
6) What is the purpose of debt registers?
The purpose for Debt Registers is to allow you to see the transactions that are affecting the
Account Balance. This is also the place where transactions are created for Loan and
Mortgage accounts that will update the Current Balance for those account types.
7) I do not see any account register for my loan account under spending account
window but I do see a register in Debt Center. Can I see the debt register under
spending account window?
No, only accounts you can spend from are listed in the Spending Accounts window.
8) Transactions do not download for loans and mortgages, why do we have the option to
Update Balance in Debt Registers?
The Update Balance function is provided for debt accounts to ensure the accuracy of
information provided in the Debt Center, such as the time to pay off the loan and principal &
interest figures.
9) Will transactions created in Debt Registers reflect in the corresponding account
register?
Yes. For credit card and line of credit accounts, transactions created/edited/deleted from the
debt register will be reflected in the corresponding account registers. The account register is
exactly the same as the debt register for credit card and line of credit accounts. This does not
apply to Loans or Mortgage accounts.
10) What is the difference between "Update Balance" and "Reconcile" in Debt
Registers?
Update Balance is for loan and mortgage accounts only. The Update Balance function simply
updates the account balance by creating an Account Adjustment transaction. You are not
presented with a list of transactions that can be compared in order to reconcile the account as
is the case with credit cards, lines of credit, or other spending accounts.
11) Why does the amount assigned to the Debt Envelope not match the amount shown
in the Debt Registers for Mortgages and Loans?
The amount assigned to the Debt Envelope is the total (Principal, Interest, Escrow,
Fees/others). The corresponding deposit in the Debt Register includes only the principal that
affects the mortgage or loan account balance.
319. Why do I get the error "Unable to update biller whose bill
presentment request is pending. Please try again later."?
You will get this error if you are trying to delete a biller/payee in bill pay that has a request
for an electronic bill pending. You cannot delete a biller/payee if you've requested an e-bill
(electronic bill) and the request is in a pending status. Unfortunately, you will have to wait
until you recieve the first e-bill to delete this biller/payee.
If you have been receiveing this error for a long time, you may want to contact the
biller/payee and ask them to approve your e-bill request.
320. Why am I getting the error 36617 when adding an account to
bill pay?
If you are getting this error, it is most lylike that you are trying to add an account that is listed
as a "read only" account at your financial institution's website. Due to the account being a
"read only" account, you will be unable to add this account to bill pay.
321. Why am I getting the error "36010 subscriber not currently
active 80600"?
This error means that FiServ, our third party bill pay provider (formerly known
as CheckFree), has frozen your bill pay account. Usually this will occur due to fraudulent
activity or unpaid fees to FiServ (such as NSF fees, over the limit transaction fees, or other
service fees). To resolve this issue, you need to contact Fiserv directly at 1-800-848-1337 and
select option 3.
Their hours of operation are Monday through Friday 8 am to 9 pm EST and 8:00 am 4:30 pm
EST on Saturdays.
322. Why is nothing happening when I submit my log in credentials
while trying to add an account?
This usually occurs if you have a special character in your password. While most special
characters are supported by our application, there are a few that are not. The special
characters that are not supported by our application are & < > ; : and |
To get this account added to the application, and to allow it to automatically update, you will
need to go to your financial institution's website and change your password so that it does not
contain any of the unsupported special characters. Once you have made that change at your
financial institution's site, you can re-attempt adding the account to the application.
The special characters mentioned in this article are also not supported for the application's
password. If you try to change your password and include one or more of these special
characters the password change request will not be saved.
323. How do I combine two (or more) envelopes?
If you have decided you would like to reflect two different envelopes as one envelope, you
can do this, and here's how:
1. Create a new envelope to reflect the two (or more) envelopes you would like to combine
For instructions on creating a new envelope, please see the following answer:
Customizing Envelopes
2. Assign all of the transactions from those two envelopes to the new envelope you created.
a.)To move all of the transactions from one envelope to another, click on the envelope
the transactions are currently in, and change the date period from the last 30 days to all dates
(you will need to do this to each individual envelope that you are combining into one
envelope). If you are using a windows computer, you can click on one purchase transaction
and then hit the shift key and click on another purchase transaction further down. This will
highlight all of the transactions in between the two you click on, and you can drag them all to
the new envelope at the same time. You may need to drag and drop each one into the new
envelope individually. Please note: you will not be able to move funding transactions, we will
address that in the next step.
b.) Rather than deleteing each funding transaction individually, it will be easier for
you to simply transfer the negative amount in your new envelope from the positive amount
in the old envelopes. If you do not know how to transfer between envelopes, please see the
following answer: Envelope to envelope transfers
You will notice that (unless you were carrying a negative or positive balance in the old
envelopes) that the negative amount in your new envelope is equal to the positive amount in
your old envelopes. Please note: your old envelopes MUST be at a zero balance before the
system will let you delete them.
c.) You will repeat steps a and b until you have an empty envelope register. You may
then delete your old envelopes.
324. How can I re-name a custom created funding profile?
To rename a manually created funding profile, follow the steps below:
1. Click on fund.
2. Click on fund using a saved profile.
3. Select the funding profile you would like to edit.
4. Click on the drop down menu and click on the desired profile and click 'edit'. This will
bring up a small window that says "manage funding profiles".
5. Click on edit.
6. Enter a new name for your profile.
7. Click on "Save". This will update the name of the profile.
8. Click on finish.
325. How to assign a principal only payment from a Checking
account to a Home Equity Line of Credit account (HELOC).
Whenever money is moved between two accounts that are both listed in the Spending
Accounts pane on the bottom left side of the application, we will need to process this as an
account to account transfer. We should receive two transactions, one from each account. Due
to the nature of a HELOC account, this is not to be handled as a typical account to account
transfer. This is because depending on the financial institution the account is held at, the
HELOC account may only show you the principal amount as the transaction. When this is the
case, you will not see the full deposit amount come in from the HELOC account. Below is an
example and the steps to take in order to be able to accurately reflect these transactions.
Let's say that we made a payment to the Home Equity Line of Credit (HELOC) from the
Checking account in the amount $400.00. We should have two transactions download into
the New Transactions folder. One for a payment of $400.00 from the Checking account, and
one for a deposit of $189.00 (the principal amount) from the Home Equity Line of Credit
(HELOC) account. The deposit transaction will vary depending on your interest rate and
balance, but we have used $189.00 as an example amount.
1. You will need to make 2 new envelopes. You will need a HELOC Interest envelope and a
HELOC Principal envelope. You can group them together and name the group HELOC if
you would like, so that they are easily found and close together. If you are not sure of how to
create a new group of envelopes, please see the following answers: Creating a group for
envelopes and Creating custom envelopes.
2. Assign the deposit transaction of $189.00 from the Home Equity Line of Credit (HELOC)
to the HELOC Principal envelope.
3. You will need to split the $400 payment transaction from the checking account. To do this,
click on the payment transaction for $400.00 from the Checking account so that it is
highlighted, and then click on "split" at the top of the new transactions window.
4. From the split window, select the HELOC Principal envelope and then enter the principal
amount of the payment (in this example, $189.00). Then click on the plus sign (+) to add
another envelope to split the transaction to and select the HELOC Interest envelope. You will
then enter the difference which will be the interest payment amount of (in this example)
$211.00.
326. I cannot see the whole setup wizard window and no scroll bars
appear to move within the window.
To resolve this issue, follow the steps below:
1. Log out of the application.
2. Log back in and maximize the browser window that has the application in it.
3. If you are not prompted to continue set up, click on 'tools' at the top of the application and
select 'set up wizard'.
You should now see the set up wizard window in full. If you still do not, it may be a screen
resolution problem. To change the screen resolution, click on Start, Control Panel, or Start,
Settings, Control Panel. Click to open the Display icon. Then click on the Settings tab. Click
the screen resolution slider bar and drag it to the right, until the setting shows 1024x768.
Click OK. There will probably be a prompt that you need to click to confirm. Once that is
complete, switch back to the application, and double-click on the top bar. You may also log
out and log back in again.
327. What does the "C" and "R" next to a transaction mean, and
can I change it?
A "C" next to a transaction means that this transaction has cleared your financial institution
and has been downloaded into the application.
When you reconcile your account and transactions, the C will change to an R which lets you
know that the transaction has been cleared and reconciled.
An "R" next to a transaction means it has been reconciled.
This cannot be changed except when you reconcile a cleared transaction. This will change the
C to an R. Once a transaction is reconciled, you cannot unreconcile it, so it will have the R
next to it for the remaining time that you use the application (unless you do a reset).
328. How can I add an Escrow account to the application?
An escrow account normally refers to when a mortgage company establishes a type of
'savings' account for home insurance and property taxes funds during the term of the
mortgage. Normally, you cannot access these funds for anything other than the designated
purpose, and in many cases, the mortgage company will pay the insurance and taxes for you
from the account using an automatic payment method, so this is often money that you do not
see.
If you choose to do so, you can add your escrow account as an offline "Other Asset" in the
application.
Remember that you will need to manually update the balance of this account since it will not
have transactions downloaded due to it being an offline account.
329. How do I account for commission I earn?
Commissions, bonuses, and tax returns should be tracked as income in the application, so that
you can proactively decide what you are going to do with that bonus, commission, or tax
return.
Since commissions, bonuses, and tax returns will usually vary by large amounts, we suggest
that you pick a modest number that you feel comfortable with stating that you will receive. If
you do not get this amount when the bonus, commission, or tax return is actually paid, you
can change the amount and make necessary adjustments in the spend plan. If you make more
than the amount that you enter in the spend plan, you will be able to apply the "extra" amount
directly to your financial goals. If you have a fixed bonus plus commission, you can also put
in just the fixed amount (this will also allow you to plan the additional money over the fixed
amount directly toward your financial goals).
When you add the income, you can average it out across the year in the spend plan, or you
can simply reflect it in the month that you expect to receive it. Depending on your individual
situation, it may be best to plan every single month differently, and apply your
bonus/commission/tax return directly to your financial goal (use the 12 month view in the
spend plan), or it may be more beneficial to average it out (use the monthly average view in
the spend plan). In either circumstance, when you add the income, you will want to select the
income pay period as once a year, once a quarter, or however often you are paid these
commissions and/or bonuses or tax returns. It will be easier to select a 'fixed pay date' and
select a day late in the month that is later than the date you expect (or estimate) the bonus,
commission, or tax return to be received.
If you need assitance with how to add an income, please see the following knowledgebase
answer: Entering Income Sources
330. Can I change the $ symbol to a different currency symbol?
Unfortunately, the application only supports the U.S. dollar symbol $. You may add accounts
associated with different currencies as long as your financial institution is supported,
however, the application will not make a distinction between currencies.
If you have spending accounts with multiple currencies, you may want to consider different
groups of envelopes that are only funded from an individual account.
331. What is flex?
Adobe flex is the platform that supports our program. It is a highly productive, free open
source framework for building and maintaining expressive web applications that deploy
consistently on all major browsers, desktops, and operating systems. It offers a rich consumer
interface and is the latest in secure web application technology.
If you would like to get more inforamtion on flex, you can find it at the link below:
http://www.adobe.com/products/flex/
332. Can I change the font size in the application?
Unfortunately, the font size in the application cannot be changed. This feature may become
available in the future.
333. What do the error codes ranging in the 500's mean?
Errors in the 500 range will appear if the financial institution's website is down or unavailable
(usually when they are doing maintenance or making changes to the site). If you wait for an
hour or more, the error will usually disappear, (as the financial institution's site will most
likely be available again) and then you can try to manually refresh the account(s).
To manually refresh the account(s), please login to the application, select "Manage" under
Spending Accounts in the bottom left pane of the application, and then on the Account
Manager screen that comes up, click the refresh icon (two arrows going around in a circle)
next to the account that is getting the error and follow the prompts provided.
If the error persists for more than 4 hours, please contact Customer Support for further
assistance by clicking on 'chat with a live representative' in the upper right hand corner of this
window.
334. What does a stale bill pay account mean?
The account status in Bill Pay will be stale if the account is unconfirmed and was added more
than 45 days ago. The solution will be different based on the following scenarios:
Scenario A.) Only one checking account is added to Bill Pay:
1. Add a new checking account.
2. Wait for the confirmation deposits (2-3 business days)
3. Confirm ownership of the new checking account by validating the amounts of the two
small deposits within the Bill Pay application. (for help on how to confirm, please see the
following answer: Confirming a bill pay account
4. Go into My Accounts and change the billing account to the new account that we just
confirmed. (This is also referred to as the "Service Fee Account)
5. Delete the old checking account from "My Accounts" to avoid remitting the payments
from the wrong account.
6. Re-add the old account.
7. Wait for the confirmation deposits (2-3 business days)
8. Confirm ownership of this account by validating the amounts of the two small deposits
within the Bill Pay application.
9. Go into My Accounts and change the billing account to the one that you re-added.
Scenario B.) There are two checking accounts added and the stale account is also the service
fee account:
In this scenario, you need switch the service fee account and delete the stale account and add
it again. Here's how you can change the service fee or billing account:
1. Click the Edit button next to the account you want to set as Billing account.
2. In the Edit Account page that opens, check the box next to 'Billing Account'.
3. Click the Save Changes button at the bottom to save the changes you have made.
Scenario C.) There are two checking accounts added and the stale account is not the service
fee account:
In this scenario, we can simply delete the stale account from Bill Pay and add it again.
Scenario D.) You do not have a second checking account:
If you do not have another checking account, then you will need to submit all of the required
information in a paper enrollment form and send it by postal mail to Fiserv Inc. The
enrollment form is available through customer support, please select to 'chat with a live
representative' and request that the paper form be sent to you.
335. Why am I receiving the error "Payment (or transfer) amount
has exceeded the limit" while I'm trying to pay my bills or transfer
between accounts? (or error 44035)
This answer only applies if you have confirmed your bill pay account. If the checking
account you have added to bill pay is not confirmed, you will be unable to schedule a
payment.
If you are receiving this error, it is because you have exceeded the payment and/or
transfer amount limit that Fiserv has set for you. These limits are determined based on
information that Fiserv receives from the consumer credit reporting agency that verifies your
information when you enroll for bill pay. Unfortunately, these limits (daily limit, weekly
limit, and monthly limit) are not disclosed to us from Fiserv, and we do not have the ability to
change them.
If you would like, you can attempt to schedule payments or transfers for smaller amounts.
336. Why can't I pay my bills using a savings account or a credit
card in bill pay?
Due to the platform of our bill pay program, FiServ, our bill pay provider, is unable to accept
credit cards and savings accounts as methods of payment because they do not have routing
numbers. You can only use checking and money market accounts to pay your bills using bill
pay.
337. How secure is my information?
All of the information you provide such as user names and passwords are encyrpted using
128 bit encyption. No support personnel have the ability to see this information. Support
agents are able to see the accounts added under your user name, the status of those accounts,
and the individual transactions for troubleshooting purposes only. All data is held in an
offsite, secure data center and are stored in encrypted form at this center. We have a third
party auditor, Security Metrics, that tests our internal and external security on a quarterly
basis, and we have never failed an audit. We are currently a member of the Better Business
Bureau online, and have an A+ rating, which is the best rating a business can get.
We have a four-layer security plan in place:
Transmission Encryption
Storage Encryption
Physical Security
Access Security
The application is designed so that if you were to log in at a public place (such as a library)
and walk away, none of your sensitive information could be accessed. Security is a priority
for us at finicity, due to the nature of the products we offer.
If you are still uncomfortable with sharing your inforamtion with us, you have the option
within the application to not store your log in credentials. If you choose to do this, you will
just need to manually enter your credentials when you want your account transactions to be
downloaded.
338. Where can I find the Mvelopes user agreement?
You are presented with the Mvelopes user agreement before enrollment, and are required to
agree to it for an enrollment to be successful. You may also access the user agreement at any
time at the following link:
http://mvelopes.com/support/user-agree.php
339. How do I reflect a voided check in the application?
You may choose to keep track of voided checks in order to keep your check numbers in
order in the application. To reflect a voided check, you can create a manual transaction for
that check number in the amount of $0.00
You will then want to manually clear that transaction by highlighting the transaction and
clicking on "clear".
340. How do I delete payee(s) from the pop up list while recording
transactions manually?
If an unwanted payee is saved in your auto complete list, start typing the payees name,
and then you can simply use your down arrow key to navigate through the lsit of payees until
you get to the payee name you wish to delete, and then, when that payee is highlighted, use
the 'delete' button on your key board. This will delete the payee from your saved payee list.
341. How do I resolve an error 103 while adding an account?
An error 103 indicates that the login credentials provided do not work at this financial
institution's web site. Please log in to this financial institution's site and make sure that your
credentials work, and try to add the account again. If you still get the error, please chat with a
live representative in support for more assistance.
342. How long does it take to receive the bill account confirmation
deposits?
Deposit transactions for unconfirmed accounts in Bill Pay can take up to two weeks,
however, most people find the transactions within one week.
343. How do I proactively manage Bank of America's Keep the
Change program in the application?
If you bank with Bank of America, you should be familiar with “KEEP THE CHANGE”.
Each time you make a purchase, Bank of America rounds up to the nearest dollar amount and
transfers the difference from your checking account to your savings account. For instance, if
you purchase an item for $1.49, 51 cents will be transferred from your checking account to
your savings account automatically.
If you have both accounts added into the application, you'll receive a transaction from each
account reflecting the "KEEP THE CHANGE" transfer.
For example, you will get a transaction from your checking account that says “KEEP THE
CHANGE TRANSFER TO ACCT 1234 FOR 10/12/09”, and you will get a transaction from
your saving account that says “KEEP THE CHANGE CREDIT FROM ACCT 4321 FOR
10/11/09” for the same amount.
Using our conventional way by performing account transfers would not be the way to
proactively manage “KEEP THE CHANGE” because you will not know exactly how much
you will need to transfer to your savings envelope, especially if you have other transactions
that affect your Bank of America Savings account. This also applies to Wachovia's
"WAY2SAVE".
The best way to proactively fund your Savings envelope is by finding out the average “KEEP
THE CHANGE” transfer. To track it, you should make a “KEEP THE CHANGE” envelope.
After your bank posts the transaction from your Checking account, you will assign that
transaction (example: KEEP THE CHANGE TRANSFER TO ACCT 1234 FOR 10/12/09) to
your new “Keep the change” envelope. Then, once you receive the transaction from your
Savings account, (example: KEEP THE CHANGE CREDIT FROM ACCT 4321 FOR
10/11/09), you will assign that transaction to your Savings envelope.
This way, the only envelope you will need to fund is your new “KEEP THE CHANGE”
envelope. Because you are tracking only your “KEEP THE CHANGE” transactions in that
envelope, you will get an idea of an average transfer so that you can fund this new envelope
proactively every month.
To save time, I recommend making a Rule for each transaction under Transaction Rules
Manager. Please follow the instructions below:
For your Checking account:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click on “Tool’ which is located on the upper left hand corner of your menu bar.
Click on ‘Transaction Rules Manager’
Click on ‘New’
Under the ‘Rule Name’ field, type “Keep the change from checking”.
Under the field ‘Payee contains:’, type “KEEP THE CHANGE CREDIT TO ACCT”
Under ‘Perform the following actions(s):’, select ‘Assign to’ and then select your new
“Keep the change” envelope.
7. Click Save.
For your Savings account:
8. Click on ‘New’
9. Under the ‘Rule Name’ field, type “Keep the change to Savings”.
10. Under the field ‘Payee contains:’, type “KEEP THE CHANGE TRANSFER FROM
ACCT”
11. Under ‘Perform the following actions(s):’, select ‘Assign to’ your Savings envelope.
12. Click Save.
344. No Debt is Listed in Debt Center
Before a debt account can be imported into the Debt Center, the debt account must be added
in Mvelopes first. Once you add the debt account to Mvelopes, you will have the ability to
import it into the Debt Center for analysis.
For more information on adding online account to Mvelopes, please visit our knowledge base
by selecting the Support icon and search for "add online account".
345. How do I download Opera Mini for use on my mobile device?
Opera Mini is very popular mobile web browser with capabilities that often exceed a mobile
device's pre-installed browser.
We recommend installing this web browser on the Blackberry Curve 8830 for use with
Mvelopes Mobile. The default web browser does not render the "Assign to" drop down, so
transactions cannot be assigned from this device with the RIM web browser.
To install Opera Mini, visit http://mini.opera.com/ for detailed instructions.
On some devices, you can visit http://mini.opera.com/ from the mobile web browser and
perform an installation over the air.
346. Insufficient Funds Pop-up
When you assign a payment transaction with a balance insufficient enough to cover the value
of the purchase, the "Insufficient Funds" pop-up window is displayed. It is a reminder to help
maintain positive envelope balances.
"Put money into this envelope by Funding" option is the default selection. If Income Cash
Pool is 0.00, then this option will be disabled and the next option - "Transfer money from
another envelope" would be selected by default.
If you click OK after selecting "Put money into this envelope by Funding", then
1. The transaction would be assigned to the spending envelope.
2. The "Insufficient Funds" window would close.
3. And the "Envelope Funding" window would be displayed
If you click OK after selecting "Transfer money from another envelope", then
1. The transaction would be assigned to the spending envelope.
2. The "Insufficient Funds" window would close.
3. And the "Envelope Transfer" window will be displayed with "Transfer To" set to the
envelope to which the transaction was being assigned to.
If you click OK after selecting "Let this envelope go negative", then
1. The transaction will be assigned to the spending envelope.
2. The "Insufficient Funds" window will close and no further action would be taken.
To turn this feature off permanently, you can select "Do not show this message again” check
box.
347. Possible Income for Funding pop-up
If there is one or more unassigned deposit transactions associated with deposit accounts, then
the "Possible Income for Funding" pop-up window is displayed after "New Transactions" is
selected.
You can select one or more deposit transactions and click "Fund". This will close the
"Possible Income for Funding" window and launch the "Envelope Funding" page. If "Fund"
is clicked without selecting any deposit, an alert message "Please select at least one
transaction." is displayed.
To select multiple sources of income to fund your envelopes with, hold down the CTRL key
to select multiple deposit transactions.
To turn this feature off permanently, you can select "Do not show this message again” check
box.
348. What is the purose of the Import Bank File feature?
You can manually import transactions for your bank accounts. To do this, you need to login
to your financial institution's website and download QFX/OFX/QIF file(s) that contains
the transaction data. You can then upload these files into Mvelopes by one of the methods
described below:
1. Select File, Import, Bank File.
2. Select "Import Bank File" from the list of menu options in "New Transactions".
3. Select account under "Spending Accounts" and click "Import Bank File" from the list of
menu options at the top of the account register.
The benefits of importing transactions manually are:
1. If we are temporarily unable to import transactions automatically from your financial
institution while we work on a trouble ticket, this solution allows you to import your
transactions without having to type the data in manually.
2. You can import missing transactions, if automatic retrieval fails to bring them in
automatically. If you have missing transactions from the past there is no longer a need to
contact Support to get the data imported for you.
3. With this approach, you may choose not to store your bank account login credentials. To
do this, select "Manage" under "Spending Accounts", click pencil icon to the left of the
account and check "Do not store my login information" listed at the bottom of the page.
349. How can I import transaction data files manually?
To import transactions, login to mvelopes and select File, Import, Bank File.
Click "Browse", choose the file (.qif, qfx or ofx format) containing transactions, and click
"Import Select File".
Select the appropriate account from "Accounts" drop-down and click OK.
If a different account from the file that contains transactions is selected, import will fail with
a "Transactions not found for the given account number" message. Likewise, if the account
selected is of a different type (say savings is selected and the file imported belongs to a
checking account), then "Transactions not found for the given account type" will be
displayed. If the file uploaded has transactions belonging to multiple accounts that have the
same number and are of the same account type, import will fail and a message "Unable to
identify the correct account from QFX file" will be displayed.
If successful, "Import transaction completed successfully" is displayed and these transactions
are listed under "New Transactions".
NOTE:
1. If filters/rules for automatic assignment of transactions are set, they are directly listed
under "Auto Assigned Transactions" and assigned to appropriate envelopes.
2. Transactions prior to account set up in mvelopes will not be imported. If the imported
file contains transactions both prior and after the account creation date, only the latter will be
imported.
3. Only transactions with non-zero value will be imported.
4. Importing .qif files will not update the account's "Online Balance" as this file does not
contain account balance information.
You can also import transactions by selecting "Import Bank File" in "New Transactions" or
"Import Bank File" from the list of menu options at the top of the account register under
"Spending Accounts".
350. Why does importing transactions manually from a compatible
data file fail?
A manual transactions import can fail due to the following reasons:
1. If the file selected belongs to an unsupported account type (non-spending accounts like
mortgage, loan, CD etc). The message "Unsupported Account Type" is displayed.
2. If a .qif file is selected but a different account is chosen from "Accounts" drop-down. The
message "CAUTION! Once you click OK, this operation cannot be undone." is displayed
followed by "Transactions not found for the given account type". For .qfx/.ofx file types,
only "Transactions not found for the given account type" is displayed; caution message is
specific to .qif files.
EXCEPTION: If the .qif file selected belongs to a checking account and the account selected
is either savings or money market, clicking "OK" in the caution message leads to successful
import of transactions. The same holds true while uploading .qif file for either savings or
money market. This is because there is no provision in QIF files to distinguish between these
three account types.
3. File(s) to be imported is too large. The maximum file size supported is 1.9 MB. The
message "Large file size" is displayed.
4. If connectivity breaks between the financial institution and Mvelopes' servers. The
message "Something went wrong" is displayed.
5. If a file to be uploaded is a format other than .qfx/.ofx/.qif. The message "Incorrect File
Format" is displayed. To understand the difference between the three supported formats,
please select "Format Help" in Import Transactions page.
351. Is mvelopes website secure? The home page doesn't begin with
"https".
The home page itself is not delivered over Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), a protocol that
provides security and data integrity for communications over the Internet; however, the login
credentials are posted over SSL on the backend, so if someone were listening to the
connection, they would not see your credentials in plain text. You may also log in at
https://my.mvelopes.com/ if you would rather start from an SSL page.
352. What is error 194?
Accounts will fail with an error 194 if the security questions set up for this financial
institution contains:
a) Special characters |<>&%#`.
b) Security questions' length is greater than 100 characters
c) Security questions' length is less than 4 characters
To fix this issue, please contact Product Support by selecting the Support icon and select
"Live Chat". Alternately, you can drop in an offline request through "Ask a Question"
353. What is an error 106/168?
The 106 error means that the program is unable to match up the account number and website
nickname it has on file with what is displayed on the institution's web site. It could also
happen if the account is not listed at the bank's website (possibly the account is no longer
active).
If the accounts are active and listed , we need to rediscover them and then modify the existing
ones to match, to fix this issue.
1. In the Spending Accounts windowpane on the lower-left area of the main window, click
the Add button.
2. In the Add Accounts window enter the name of the institution in the Search bar and click
Search.
3. When the search completes and moves to Step 2, click on the name of the financial
institution on the left.
4. Enter the login credentials that you use at the institution's site and then click Submit.
5. This will take you to Step 4 where the accounts are discovered. Scroll down past any
grayed-out accounts.
Do you see any non-grayed out accounts here? If you do, please proceed with the rest of
this instruction set, if not, please contact support via Live Chat for further assistance.
6. Write down what is shown for the Account Nickname and what is shown for the Account
Number for each account that is not grayed out (some institutions will not display an account
nickname).
7. Click Cancel.
8. Back in the main application window go back to the Spending Accounts section and click
on the Manage button.
9 You will then click on the small pencil icon next to the account that is failing.
10. In the Account Setup - Modify Account window that opens, enter the account number
that you wrote down into the account number field for each account.
11. Enter the Account Nickname that you wrote down into the Website Name field for each
account that was failing.
12. Click Submit.
13. Click Submit again.
14. In the Account Manager window you can now click the Update button to have the
program update the account with the corrected information.
If the error returns, then login to your financial institution's web site in a different window
so that you can see all of your accounts at the same time.
15. Repeat step 8, and compare the Account Number in the application to what is listed on
the financial institution's site and compare the Website Name in the application to what is
listed on the financial institution's web site.
354. What is an error 324 and how do I resolve it?
The 324 error means that the program is unable to match up the account number and website
nickname it has on file with what is displayed on the institution's web site. It could also
happen if the account is not listed at the bank's website (possibly the account is no longer
active).
If the accounts are active and listed , we need to rediscover them and then modify the existing
ones to match, to fix this issue.
1. In the Spending Accounts windowpane on the lower-left area of the main window, click
the Add button.
2. In the Add Accounts window enter the name of the institution in the Search bar and click
Search.
3. When the search completes and moves to Step 2, click on the name of the financial
institution on the left.
4. Enter the login credentials that you use at the institution's site and then click Submit.
5. This will take you to Step 4 where the accounts are discovered. Scroll down past any
grayed-out accounts.
Do you see any non-grayed out accounts here? If you do, please proceed with the rest of
this instruction set, if not, please contact support via Live Chat for further assistance.
6. Write down what is shown for the Account Nickname and what is shown for the Account
Number for each account that is not grayed out (some institutions will not display an account
nickname).
7. Click Cancel.
8. Back in the main application window go back to the Spending Accounts section and click
on the Manage button.
9 You will then click on the small pencil icon next to the account that is failing.
10. In the Account Setup - Modify Account window that opens, enter the account number
that you wrote down into the account number field for each account.
11. Enter the Account Nickname that you wrote down into the Website Name field for each
account that was failing.
12. Click Submit.
13. Click Submit again.
14. In the Account Manager window you can now click the Update button to have the
program update the account with the corrected information.
If the error returns, then login to your financial institution's web site in a different window
so that you can see all of your accounts at the same time.
15. Repeat step 8, and compare the Account Number in the application to what is listed on
the financial institution's site and compare the Website Name in the application to what is
listed on the financial institution's web site.
355. What does Error Code 3 mean?
An Error Code "3" means your prior manualy initated aggregation is still in process. It could
take up to an hour to timeout. Please try refreshing your account later. If it fails again, visit
our support team via Live Chat to report the issue.
356. Common used terms used in Mvelopes:
Common used terms used in Mvelopes:
A
Accrue: To accumulate or be added periodically. (The balance in your holiday gifts envelope may need to
accrue throughout the year so you have the money set aside ready to spend in December).
Allocate: To allocate funds means to set aside or earmark the funds for a specific purpose. When you set
up your spending plan, you are allocating a set amount for each envelope.
Assets: An asset is a personal belonging or property that you own or in which you have equity. If you own
a home, it is considered an asset. The debt amount of your mortgage loan is a liability. The furniture in your
home would also be considered an asset. Don't forget about your savings accounts, investments accounts,
and retirement accounts; those are all assets as well.
Average Monthly Income: Average monthly income is the average amount that you bring home each
month, including any periodic income that you have. This figure takes your periodic income, divides it by 12
and adds that amount to your fixed monthly net income.
D
Debt Roll-Down Method: The debt roll-down method is a time proven method of quickly and efficiently
eliminating debt. If you have three loans you are working to pay off, pay the minimum on each, plus any
extra that you can on the first one. Once the first loan is paid of, take the payment you were making on the
1st loan, plus the accelerator payment, and combine it (or Roll it down) with the minimum monthly payment
to the second loan. When you've paid off the second, roll that payment amount to the third loan.
Drag and Drop: Drag and drop is a common term in many software applications. Roll your mouse icon
over the item you want to select and then depress the left mouse button and hold it down. Now simply drag
the item you have selected by moving your mouse with the left button still pressed. When your mouse icon
is on top of the place you want to drop the item, simply release the button.
E
Envelope Spending Accounts: Envelope Spending Accounts are the envelopes from which you will do
your spending throughout the month. Your envelope spending accounts are what make up your spending
plan, and are where you track your purchases, expenses, deposits, etc.
F
Fixed Monthly Income: Fixed Monthly Income refers to income that you receive every month on a regular
basis, such as your salary or wage.
Fund: To fund your envelopes means to put money into them for your spending requirements.
Funded: If your Envelope Spending Accounts have been funded, it means that you have deposited money
into them from which you will do your spending for the month.
Funding Allocation: The funding allocation is the amount assigned to an envelope account in your
spending plan.
Funding Profile: A funding profile is a memorized transaction, automatically dividing your paycheck or
other source of income among your envelopes. Funding profiles are automatically created based on the
amounts you enter in your spending plan, but can also be created manually within the Income Cash Pool
and then saved for later use.
I
Income Source: An Income Source is any source from which you get paid. This can be an employer, a
client, a company that you contract with, etc.
L
Liabilities: A liability is generally a debt that you have incurred. This can be anything from your mortgage
or auto loan to an outstanding credit card balance.
M
Manual Transactions: A manual transaction is a transaction that you create in the Mvelopes Personal
system. It is not downloaded from an online bank, credit card, or other financial institution.
Match: To match a transaction basically means to "clear" a transaction manually, just as it would have
been cleared at your bank or financial institution. If you have created a manual transaction, you will match it
to its electronic counterpart from the bank. If you have made a credit card payment, you will match the
credit payment to the withdrawal from your bank account.
Monthly Income: Monthly income is the income that you receive each month. This will be the number that
your Spending Plan is based upon.
Monthly Required Expenses: Monthly required expenses are expenses that you incur every month, are
typically a set amount, and are not expenses that you can typically cut out or skip. These are things like
rent or mortgage, power, natural gas, water/trash, or auto payments.
Monthly Spending Plan: Your monthly spending is the part of your overall spending plan that shows how
you plan to spend your fixed monthly net income, and where that income will be allocated.
N
Net Income: Net income is the amount of income that you "take home" from each paycheck, after taxes
and other deductions.
O
Online Balance: Each account register displays both an online balance and a register balance. The
register balance is based on the transactions you've recorded for that register in Mvelopes. The online
balance is the current account balance as posted by the financial institution.
P
Pay Period: Pay period refers to the schedule of your paychecks. Depending upon your employment this
can be weekly, twice a month, monthly, etc.
Pending Transactions: When you create a manual transaction, make an account-to-account transfer, or
make a credit card payment, you will have transactions that you will "match" to their electronic counterpart.
These unmatched manual transactions will be in the window at the bottom of the New Transactions screen
that is labeled "Pending Transactions."
Periodic Income: Periodic income refers to income that you do not receive every month. This may be a
bonus that you receive quarterly or yearly. If your "pay period" is every two weeks, or weekly, periodic
income can also refer to the extra paycheck that you receive during the two months of the year where there
is one extra pay period.
Periodic Spending Plan: Your periodic spending plan is a part of your overall spending plan and shows
how you will save for periodic expenses, and how your periodic paychecks will be allocated.
R
Register: Each envelope and account has a register. The register is simply a listing of each transaction in
the account or envelope. When you click on an envelope or account in the left windowpane, the
corresponding register will open in the right windowpane.
Register Balance: Each account register displays both an online balance and a register balance. The
register balance is based on the transactions you've recorded for that register in Mvelopes. The online
balance is the current account balance as posted by the financial institution.
S
Spending Accounts: Spending Accounts are accounts typically used for spending transactions. These
accounts include checking and money market accounts, savings accounts and credit cards. Only these
accounts are shown in the lower left window of Mvelopes.
Spending Plan: Your Spending Plan is the map of where you plan to spend your money each month. This
should encompass monthly and periodic spending requirements and debt reduction as well as savings and
investments.
Sweeping Your Envelopes: In order to maximize any savings you find through managing your spending,
you will want to combine left over money from your monthly envelopes, into savings, debt reduction, or
investments.
T
Tool Bar: The tool bar is navigation mechanism to get from one area of Mvelopes Personal to another. The
tool bar consists of the following icons: Spend Plan, Bill Pay, Net Worth, Reports, Calculator, Mobile,
Tutorials, and Live Chat.
Traditional Envelope Method: The Traditional Envelope Method of Budgeting refers to the method of
creating actual paper "envelopes" to spend from. When cash was more regularly used for all purchases,
people would cash their checks, and then divide the cash into different envelopes for their spending needs.
V
Variable Income: Variable Income usually refers to commissions or bonuses that are received throughout
the year. It is any income that varies from month-to-month, week-to-week, or throughout the year. Hourly
employees who do not work a set schedule may also have variable income, based on the number of hours
they work within a pay period.
W
Windowpane: A windowpane is an area of the Mvelopes application. Click on an icon in the left
windowpane to view the transactions for the associated envelope or account in the right windowpane.
357. What actions count towards the stipulated 15 free transactions
in Bill pay?
Following actions count towards the stipulated 15 free transactions in Bill pay:
1) One Bill Pay transaction will be deducted from the fifteen available each time you make a single
payment from your checking account to the payee of your choice.
2) If you transfer money from one checking account to another, this process involves two separate
electronic transactions, and will deduct two transactions from the fifteen available.
3) Each payment cancelled is also counted under the stipulated 15 free transactions in Bill pay. This
is the policy of our bill pay provider, FiServ, as they incur a cost to cancel a scheduled payment.
358. I get an error Error 42358 when I delete biller. Why?
The error 42358 indicates that the payee that you are attempting to delete has ebill enabled. You
need to first stop ebill and then attempt to delete the payee.
Steps to stop ebill:
1) Click Manage My Bills tab within Bill Pay.
2) Select the Biller Name from the drop down list next to “Biller Name”
3) In the “What would you like to do”? drop down list select "Stop an electronic version of my bill"
4) Click Yes on the confirmation box that will appear.
359. Error 109 - Password Change Required
Error 109 indicates that a password change is required at the financial institution's website.
From time to time a financial institution will require you to change your password on their
website.
Please login to their website and change the password. Then follow these steps to update your
new login credentials in the application:
1) Login to the application.
2) Click the Manage button under Spending Accounts section.
3) Click on the pencil ("Edit") button next to the account you wish to change the login
credentials.
4) Update your username and password here and click Submit and then Submit again.
5) Once finished you can have the application check for new transactions by clicking on the
Update button next to your account.
6) You will know that the accounts have updated when the "Last Update:" time stamp shows
today's date and time.
7) Click Finish.
8) Click on 'Refresh' in the Spending Accounts Register to update the account(s).
If the account(s) does not update after completing these steps, please chat with a customer
service representative by clicking on the Support icon within the application. On the support
page, click on 'Live Chat' with Support link. Enter the details and get connected with live
help.
360. Why I am unable to set up ebills? or Ebill icon disappeared
after a few days. Why?
If customers are unable to setup ebills, please check if username and password is required to access
this payee/biller. If yes, then inform the customer we cannot set up such ebill enabled payees in bill
pay. The aggregation platform for FISERV, our third party bill pay service provider, does not support
setting up such web-scraped ebills.
361. Bill Pay/FISERV Maintenance Window for 2012
Bill pay will be down on the following days for maintenance activities.
Date:
January 22
February 19
March 11
April 22
May 20
June 17
July 22
August 19
September 23
October 21
November 4
December 2
Time:
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET (3 hours due to time
change)
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET (5 hours due to time
change)
2 a.m. to 6 a.m. ET